Model LE-9000SX Express/LE

Model LE-9000SX Express/LE
PATTERNLESS EDGER
Model LE-9000SX Express/LE-9000LX Express
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
NIDEK CO., LTD.
(Manufacturer)
: 34-14, Maehama, Hiroishi-cho, Gamagori, Aichi 443-0038, Japan
Telephone: (81-533) 67-6611
Facsimile: (81-533) 67-6610
NIDEK CO., LTD
: 3F Sumitomo Fudosan Hongo Bldg., 3-22-5, Hongo,
(Tokyo Office)
Bunkyo-Ku, Tokyo 113-0033, Japan
Telephone: (81-3) 5844-2641
Facsimile: (81-3) 5844-2642
NIDEK INCORPORATED
: 47651 Westinghouse Drive, Fremont, California 94539, U. S. A.
(United States Agent)
Telephone: (510) 226-5700
Facsimile: (510) 226-5750
NIDEK SOCIETE ANONYME
: Europarc 13, rue Auguste Perret, 94042 CRETEIL, France
(Authorized Representative) Telephone: (01) 49 80 97 97
Facsimile: (01) 49 80 32 08
September 2006
40345-P902F
Printed in JAPAN
BEFORE USE OR MAINTENANCE, READ THIS MANUAL.
This Operator’s Manual contains information necessary for the operation of the NIDEK
PATTERNLESS EDGER Model LE-9000SX Express/LE-9000LX Express Type PC,
Type PL4, Type PLB, and Type PLB-2R.
This manual includes the operating procedures, safety precautions, specifications, and
information about accessories, and maintenance. IEC and UL standards are applied in
this manual. This manual is necessary for proper use. Especially, the safety precautions
and operating procedures must be thoroughly understood prior to operation of the device.
Keep this manual handy for reference.
If you encounter any problems or have questions about the instrument, please contact
NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
Table of Contents
§1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................Page
1-1
1.1 Outline of the Product .............................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Symbol Information ................................................................................................. 1-2
§2 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1 Cautions during Use ................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Storage ...................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3 Transport ................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.4 Installation .................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.5 Wiring ........................................................................................................................ 2-5
2.6 After Use ................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.7 Maintenance and Checks ............................................................................................ 2-5
2.8 Disposal ..................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.9 Labels ........................................................................................................................ 2-8
2.10 Safety Functions ..................................................................................................... 2-10
§3 CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................................... 3-1
§4 OPERATING PROCEDURES.................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Operation Flow ......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Preparation ............................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3 Tracings .................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.1 Tracing frames ................................................................................................. 4-4
4.3.1.1 Tracing both rims ................................................................................ 4-4
4.3.1.2 Tracing a single rim ............................................................................. 4-5
4.3.1.3 Semiauto tracing.................................................................................. 4-5
4.3.1.4 Tracing goggle type frames ................................................................. 4-6
4.3.2 Tracing the pattern........................................................................................... 4-7
4.3.3 Tracing the dummy lens .................................................................................. 4-8
4.3.4 Tracing during processing ............................................................................. 4-10
4.3.5 Stopping the tracing ...................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.5.1 Stopping the frame tracing ................................................................ 4-10
4.3.5.2 Stopping the pattern or dummy lens tracing ..................................... 4-10
4.4 Layouts ................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.4.1 Selecting processing conditions and inputting layout data ........................... 4-11
4.4.2 Inputting the height from the lens outline ..................................................... 4-14
4.4.2.1 Layout of bifocal lenses .................................................................... 4-15
4.4.2.2 Layout of progressive power lenses .................................................. 4-16
4.4.3 Eye point layout ............................................................................................ 4-17
4.5 Blocking Lenses ..................................................................................................... 4-18
4.5.1 Blocking in active mode................................................................................ 4-18
Page
4.5.1.1 Blocking progressive power lenses ...................................................... 4-18
4.5.2 Blocking in passive mode ................................................................................ 4-19
4.5.3 Blocking bifocal lenses .................................................................................... 4-20
4.6 Processings .............................................................................................................. 4-21
4.6.1 Beveling .......................................................................................................... 4-21
4.6.1.1 Auto processing mode ......................................................................... 4-22
4.6.1.2 Guided processing mode ..................................................................... 4-25
4.6.1.3 Guided processing mode (tilting function) ............................................. 4-29
4.6.1.4 EX lens processing mode .................................................................... 4-32
4.6.2 Flat (rimless) edging ........................................................................................ 4-36
4.6.2.1 Flat (rimless) edging mode ................................................................... 4-36
4.6.2.2 EX lens flat (rimless) edging mode ....................................................... 4-39
4.6.2.3 Auto grooving mode (LE-9000SX Express only) ................................. 4-41
4.6.2.4 Guided grooving mode (LE-9000SX Express only) ............................. 4-43
4.6.2.5 EX lens grooving mode (LE-9000SX Express only) ............................. 4-47
4.6.3 Other processings ........................................................................................... 4-50
4.6.3.1 Processing for frame changing .............................................................. 4-50
4.6.3.2 Processing half-eye lenses ................................................................... 4-53
4.6.3.3 Polishing (Types PL4, PLB, and PLB-2R) ........................................... 4-56
4.6.3.4 Chamfering (LE-9000SX Express only) ............................................... 4-57
4.6.3.5 Soft processing ................................................................................... 4-58
4.6.3.6 Inputting the frame tilt angle in flat edging .............................................. 4-59
4.7 Checking the Lens Size ............................................................................................. 4-60
4.7.1 Checking the lens size ...................................................................................... 4-60
4.7.2 Retouching lenses ............................................................................................ 4-60
4.8 Processing the Opposite Lens ................................................................................... 4-62
4.9 Removing the Lens Cup ............................................................................................ 4-62
4.10 Treatment after Daily Use ....................................................................................... 4-63
4.11 Daily Checks .......................................................................................................... 4-64
4.11.1 Daily check before use .................................................................................. 4-64
4.11.2 Daily check after use ..................................................................................... 4-65
4.12 Periodical Check .................................................................................................... 4-65
§5 OTHER FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1 Process Counter ......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Parameter Settings ...................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3 Storing the Initial Screen ............................................................................................. 5-6
5.4 Storing and Calling Up Traced Data ............................................................................ 5-7
5.4.1 When the edger is not connected to the barcode scanner .................................... 5-8
5.4.2 When the edger is connected to the barcode scanner ......................................... 5-9
§6 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ..................................................................................Page
6-1
§7 STORAGE .................................................................................................................... 7-1
§8 MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Wheel Dressing ........................................................................................................ 8-1
8.2.1 Replacing the water (when the optional FP-100 is equipped) ........................ 8-5
8.2.2 Replacing the water (when the optional FP-100 is not equipped) .................. 8-7
8.3 Replacing the Water and Filter (230V regions) ...................................................... 8-10
8.4 Replacing Fuses...................................................................................................... 8-12
8.5 Cleaning the Exterior ............................................................................................. 8-12
8.6 Size Adjustment ..................................................................................................... 8-13
8.7 Adjusting the Bevel Position .................................................................................. 8-14
8.8 Adjusting the Axis Shift ......................................................................................... 8-16
8.8.1 Adjusting the axis shift for unpolished lenses ............................................... 8-16
8.9 Adjusting the Lens Margin Allowed for Finishing ................................................. 8-18
8.10 PD Adjustment ..................................................................................................... 8-19
8.11 Adjustment for Polishing ...................................................................................... 8-20
8.11.1 If part of an edge is left unpolished (Types PL4, PLB, and PLB-2R) ......... 8-20
8.11.2 If the front edge or rear edge is left unpolished (Types PLB and PLB-2R) 8-23
8.11.3 Axis shift adjustment for polished lenses (Types PL4, PLB, and PLB-2R) 8-24
8.12 Adjustment for Grooving (LE-9000SX Express only) ......................................... 8-26
8.12.1 Setting the initial value for depth and width (LE-9000 SX Express only).. 8-26
8.12.2 Adjusting the groove position (LE-9000 SX Express only) ........................ 8-27
8.12.3 Adjusting the groove depth (LE-9000SX Express only) ............................. 8-28
8.12.3.1 Groove depth is not made as designated (LE-9000SX Express only) ...
....................................................................................................................... 8-28
8.12.3.2 Groove depth is uneven (LE-9000SX Express only) ...................... 8-29
8.13 Adjustment for Chamfering (LE-9000SX Express only) ..................................... 8-31
8.13.1 Setting the SFB mode and chamfering amount (LE-9000SX Express only)8-31
8.13.2 Adjusting the chamfering amount (LE-9000SX Express only) ................... 8-32
8.13.2.1 Safety bevel is not made as designated (LE-9000SX Express only)8-32
8.13.2.2 Chamfering amount is uneven (LE-9000SX Express only) ............ 8-34
8.14 Tracer Calibration ................................................................................................. 8-35
8.15 List of Consumable Articles ................................................................................. 8-36
§9 SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................... 9-1
§10ACCESSORIES .......................................................................................................... Page
10-1
10.1 NIDEK-type Accessories ....................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 WECO-type Accessories ....................................................................................... 10-1
10.3 SANTI-type Accessories ....................................................................................... 10-2
APPENDIX A. SUPPLEMENT ............................................................................................. A-1
A.1 Selection of Tracing ................................................................................................ A-1
A.2 Selection of Layout ................................................................................................. A-3
A.3 Selection of Blocking ............................................................................................. A-4
A.4 Selection of Processing .......................................................................................... A-5
APPENDIX B. ERROR CODE ............................................................................................. B-1
APPENDIX C. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................. C-1
INDEX ...........................................................................................................End of this manual
§1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 Outline of the Product
This instrument is a fully-automatic lens edger which reads the lens outline of eyeglasses directly
from frames, and processes lenses into the shape of the frames.
This edger has a processing unit at the center front, a control panel for the processing unit at the
front, a display panel at the front right, a tracing unit, and a control panel for the tracing unit at
the upper side. The tracing unit measures the frame shape, the display panel presents the traced
outline and lens layout, and the processing unit processes the lens into a desired shape.
Several kinds of processing wheels are provided in the processing unit, and therefore, the most
suitable wheels and processing sequences can be selected according to the lens material to be
processed.
[Lens materials and processing modes]
Lens material
Type
PC
Plastic
䂾
Processing mode
Grooving
Chamfering
High index PolycarAcrylic Bevel- Flat
(SX Express Polishing (SX Express
Glass
plastic
bonate
resin
ing edging
only)
only)
䂾
䂾
䂾
䂾
䂾
䂾
䂔
×
䂔
䂾
PL4
䂾
䂾
䂾
䂾
䂾
䂾
䂾
䂔
flat edging
only
䂾
PLB
PLB-2R
䂾
䂾
䂾
䂾
䂾
䂾
×
䂾
䂾
䂾
䂾
䂾
䂾
䂔
䂔
䂔
䂔
䂾
䂾
{
×
F
䂾
: Processing is available.
: Processing is unavailable.
: Processing is available (except for glass lenses).
1-2
1.2 Symbol Information
This symbol indicates that important descriptions are contained in the operator’s manual and
that the operator must refer to the operator’s manual prior to operation or maintenance.
This symbol indicates caution for electric shock. The inside of the instrument includes highvoltage circuits. Do not remove the cover.
This symbol of the power switch indicates that when the switch is pressed to this symbol side,
power is supplied to the instrument.
This symbol of the power switch indicates that when the switch is pressed to this symbol side,
power is not supplied to the instrument.
This symbol indicates the contrast adjustment.
This symbol indicates the fuse rating.
This symbol indicates that the instrument must be supplied only with alternating current.
This symbol indicates the date of manufacture.
This symbol indicates the manufacturer.
This symbol indicates that this product shall be disposed of in a separate collection of electrical
and electronic equipment in EU.
§2
SAFETY
In this manual, signal words are used to designate the degree or level of safety alerting. The
definitions are as follows:
WARNING:
CAUTION:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage accident.
Even situations that are labeled
CAUTION may result in serious injury under certain
situations. Safety precautions must be followed strictly at all times.
2.1 Cautions during Use
WARNING
• Never touch the processing wheel when it is turning.
Injury may occur.
• Be sure to keep the soundproof cover closed during processing.
Spray including processing waste may cause eye damage.
• Should abnormal conditions such as cracks or bare areas on the processing wheel have been
found, stop using the instrument immediately and contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
Continued use of the instrument may cause the wheel to break and scatter, causing injury.
after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete
• Release the chuck by pressing
stop.
If the chuck is released before the wheels have stopped completely and a lens is dropped, it
may contact the turning wheels and its scattering may cause injury.
• Be sure to use this instrument only to process eyeglass lenses.
If this instrument processes any other materials, the processing wheels may be damaged
and cannot perform normal processing. Moreover, the wheels may break and broken pieces
may injure personnel.
2-2
CAUTION
• Never disassemble nor touch the internal structure.
Electric shock or failure of the instrument may occur.
• Never yank the power cord to disconnect it from the wall outlet. Always hold the plug.
This can damage the metal core of the cord and may result in fire, short circuit or
electric shock.
• If the internal wires of the power cord are exposed, power to the instrument is interrupted
by moving the cord, or the plug or cord becomes extremely hot, this indicates that the
cord is damaged.
Immediately remove the plug from the outlet and contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor
for replacement; otherwise, electric shock or fire may result.
• Do not crush or squeeze the power cord with heavy objects such as the instrument itself.
Damage to the cord may result in fire or electric shock.
• Occasionally, clean the prongs of the power plug with a dry cloth.
If dust settles thickly on them, they will become damp, and may cause short circuit or
fire.
• Plug in the power cord correctly until its prongs are fully inserted into the socket.
If the instrument is used with an insecure connection, fire may occur.
• In the event that the instrument gives off smoke, or a strange smell, etc., turn off the
power and unplug the power cord. After smoke stops coming out of the instrument, contact
NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
If an instrument which has this kind of abnormal condition is used, fire or electric shock may
occur. In case of fire, use a powder (ABC) extinguisher.
• If the instrument detects any abnormal condition during use, the error code will be shown
on the display panel and the instrument will stop.
Turn the power switch off after confirming the error code.
• Be sure to select the correct lens material with
.
If the wrong material is selected, the lens may break or the lifetime of the processing
wheel may be reduced.
• Be sure to chamfer the front edge and rear edge of a glass lens after processing.
Minute burrs may damage one’s skin.
• Be sure not to apply excessive stress on the stylus of the tracing unit.
The stylus is easy to bend or break.
• Be careful not to get your fingers caught when chucking (fixing) a lens.
2-3
CAUTION
• When removing the lens cup with the cup remover, hold the lens with a soft cloth.
If you hold the lens with bare hands, the lens edge may injure them.
• Be sure to confirm that wash water (for the inside wall of the processing chamber) and cooling
water (for the wheels) flow properly.
If water does not flow, lenses are not processed properly and the edger may be damaged.
NOTE
• The optional pliable lens cup is a consumable. When the double-coated adhesive tape becomes
hard to remove from the pliable lens cup, replace it with a new one.
2.2 Storage
CAUTION
• Do not store the instrument where it may get wet or where poisonous gases or liquids are present.
• Maintain the instrument under the following conditions during transport and storage (packed).
Conditions
Temperature:
–25ºC - 70ºC
Humidity:
10% - 100%
Pressure:
700 hPa - 1060 hPa
2.3 Transport
CAUTION
• When moving the instrument, ask for assistance.
Moving the instrument may cause back injury or injury by falling.
• When moving the instrument, hold (A) and (B) on both of the right and left sides. Be sure not to
hold the cover. Only hold the metal part of the underside.
The instrument may be dropped by holding
the cover only and it may cause injury and
malfunction.
• When putting the instrument down, be careful
not to get your fingers caught.
Fingers may get caught between the cabinet
and instrument injuring them.
(A)
(B)
• Use the specified packing material when transporting the instrument to lessen the damage if
dropped.
Excessive vibration or shock to the instrument may cause instrument malfunction.
2-4
2.4 Installation
CAUTION
• Use the instrument under the following conditions.
- A dust free environment
- A stable place with no tilt
- A vibration and shock free environment
• Install the instrument where it can be used at the following temperature and humidity.
Use conditions
Temperature:
5ºC - 40ºC
Humidity:
Relative humidity does not exceed 50% at a
maximum temperature of 40ºC.
Pressure:
700 hPa - 1060 hPa
• Install the instrument in a location that provides the operation area specified on p. 2-6.
Opening A: For the power cords of the pumps
Opening B: For the feedwater hoses and drain
pipe
Opening A
50
140
Opening B
470
425
322
180
510
153
40
• Use a stage whose size is larger than the
measurements of the figure to the right. Also
set the adjuster at the foot of the stage so that
the stage can be adjusted without tilt or play.
It is necessary to make openings in the top to
draw the pipe and cord through.
30
• Install the instrument on the specified cabinet (option) or a stage which is strong enough for the
weight of the instrument (42 kg).
Vibrations and noises may be produced, and normal processing may not be performed.
Position of stage foot
(4 spots)
(Measure: mm)
• Do not install the instrument in a place exposed to direct sunlight or where the temperature and
humidity are high.
• Install the instrument where pollutants such as corrosive gases, acids, and salts are not present.
Corrosion or malfunction of the instrument may occur.
• Be sure to leave 3 cm or more of space in the rear so that the fan will not be blocked.
If the fan is blocked, the temperature of the inside of the instrument will rise and it may
cause malfunction.
2-5
2.5 Wiring
CAUTION
• Do not overload one electrical outlet.
Abnormal heat generation may occur at the outlet in conjunction with the other devices.
• Be sure to use a socket which meets the power specifications.
If the line voltage is too high or low, the instrument may not perform properly. Malfunction or
fire also may also occur.
• Be sure to ground the instrument.
Electric shock or fire may occur in the event of failure or electrical leakage.
2.6 After Use
CAUTION
• If the instrument will not be used for a long time, unplug the power plug from the wall
outlet.
If a thick layer of dust settles on the prongs of the plug, it will become damp, and short
circuit or fire may occur.
• Clean the processing unit after the last use of the day.
If it is left for several days after use, the processing waste becomes settled and hard to remove.
• Turn the power switch off and keep the tracing unit cover and soundproof cover closed
when the instrument is not in use.
If dust settles, it may affect the measurement accuracy or cause malfunction.
2.7 Maintenance and Checks
CAUTION
• Be sure to perform starting inspection before use and finishing inspection after use. It is
recommended to have a periodical inspection every two years.
Inspection is performed by a service person. Contact NIDEK or your authorized
distributor.
• Be sure to maintain a space large enough for maintenance (see p. 2-6).
Working in a tight place may cause injury.
2-6
CAUTION
• Be sure to use the specified fuses for replacement.
If not, fire may occur.
• Be sure to use the suitable dressing stick for wheel dressing.
If not, the wheel may be damaged and normal processing cannot be performed.
• Be sure to replace a dressing stick worn some 4 cm with a new one.
It is hard to hold the shortened dressing stick, and hand injury may occur.
• Be sure to wear protective glasses for wheel dressing.
Spray including processing waste may cause eye damage.
• Never dress the roughing wheel for plastic lenses.
The wheel may be damaged.
• In the dressing mode, the cover sensor is released and the wheels turn with the soundproof
cover open. While dressing, work with special care.
Maintenance area
Approx. 500mm
[Operation area/ Maintenance area]
Approx. 500mm Approx. 485mm
Approx. 500mm
Approx. 500mm
Approx. 520mm
Operation area
Approx. 1000mm
2-7
CAUTION
• Be sure to use the specified stocking filter only.
If not, the filter or water supply pipe may become clogged.
• The stocking filter is disposable. Do not reuse it.
A filter which has a rip or run in it does not function as a filter, and therefore, the water
supply pipe may become clogged.
• Never use an organic solvent such as paint thinner to clean the exterior of the instrument.
This could damage the surface.
2.8 Disposal
NOTE
• Follow local governing ordinances and recycling plans regarding disposal or recycling of
device components.
• When disposing of packing materials, sort them by material, and follow local governing
ordinances and recycling plans.
• When disposing of the waste of lenses, follow local governing ordinances.
2-8
2.9 Labels
The following labels provide safety information about each part.
<Front view>
<Rear view>
or
or
or
115 V regions only
2-9
<Top view>
or
or
2 - 10
2.10 Safety Functions
For safety, various functions are provided.
[Soundproof cover check function at the start of processing]
Lens processing does not start unless the soundproof cover is closed.
CAUTION
• If the soundproof cover is opened during processing, the instrument does not stop. Be sure not
to open the soundproof cover during processing since it is hazardous.
In addition, open the soundproof cover only after making sure that the wheels have come to
a complete stop.
[Stop key]
This is the key to stop processing. Processing can be stopped immediately using this key under
abnormal conditions. Turn the power switch OFF if necessary. To restart processing after processing
has stopped, press
.
[Self-check function]
Operation conditions are checked at all times by this function. If something unusual occurs
in the instrument, operation will stop immediately and an error code which indicates the error
content will be shown on the display panel.
2 - 11
§3
CONFIGURATION
[Whole system]
Tracing unit cover
Soundproof cover
Control panel
for tracing unit
Display panel
Control panel
for processing unit
Drawer
Cabinet
[Rear side of the main body]
Power switch
Cooling fan
Contrast control
Inlet
RS-232C interface connector
Connector for barcode scanner
Outlet for pump 1
Outlet for pump 2
3-2
Soundproof cover
Prevents water and processing waste from
spraying, and it blocks the processing
sound. The processing unit is contained
under this cover.
The cover must be kept closed during
processing.
Cabinet
This is a special cabinet for the instrument, in
which the drain pipe, feedwater hoses, and
tank can be stored.
The drain pipe and feedwater hoses are
connected to the main body through the
opening of the cabinet.
Contrast control
Adjusts the contrast of the display panel. Turn
this control according to its use environment
to clear the screen.
RS-232C interface connector
This is a connector to which an external device is connected.
This connector conforms to RS-232C interface. The optional quick pattern tracer
can also be connected.
Connector for barcode scanner
This is a connector to which the optional
barcode scanner (or numeric keypad) is
connected.
Outlet for pump 2
Outlet for pump 1
These are where the power cord of the
feedwater pump 2 and feedwater pump 1 is
each connected.
The feedwater pump unit automatically
turns on and off in synchronization with the
working of the processing unit.
Inlet
This is where the power cord of the main body
is connected.
3-3
[Processing unit]
Feelers
Chamber-cleaning nozzle
Adapter
Lens clamp
Feedwater nozzles
Wheels
Grooving wheel
Chamfering wheel
3-4
Chamber-cleaning nozzle
During lens processing, the water supplied
by the nozzle washes processing waste
away before they disperse within the
processing chamber. Water prevents the
processing waste from settling in the space
between the processing wheels and the bottom of the chamber, which will adversely
affect the processing ability of the instrument.
Adapter
The blocked lens is set to the adapter.
When processing a half-eye lens, replace
the adapter with the one for half-eye
lenses.
Lens clamp
The lens set to the adapter is pushed from the
opposite side and held by this clamp.
When processing a half-eye lens, replace
the clamp with the one for half-eye
lenses.
Feedwater nozzle
Supplies water to the periphery of a lens during processing.
Wheels
Several different types of wheels compose a
set of processing wheels.
a. Roughing wheel for plastic lenses:
For roughing plastic, polycarbonate and
acrylic resin lenses
b. Roughing wheel for glass lenses:
For roughing glass lenses
c. Finishingwheel:
For finishing lenses
d. Polishingwheel:
For polishing lens edges
[Wheel combination]
• TYPE PC
a
b
c
a
b
c
• TYPE PL4
d
• TYPE PLB
a
c
d
• TYPE PLB-2R
a
b
c
d
Grooving wheel
(LE-9000SX Express only)
This is the wheel to groove lenses for nylor
frames.
Chamfering wheel
(LE-9000SX Express only)
This is the wheel to chamfer lenses.
3-5
[Tracing unit]
Rim clips
Upper slider
Lower slider
Pattern tracing pin
Stylus
Rim clips
Pattern setting unit support
[Control panel for tracing unit]
3-6
Lower slider
Upper slider
Frames are set between these sliders.
Rim clips
The rims of frames are held by these clips.
Each upper and lower slider has two
clips.
Pattern tracing pin
Measures a pattern or dummy lens shape
by tracing it.
Normally, this pin is stored in the tracer.
Stylus
Measures a frame shape by tracing its
bevel groove.
Pattern setting unit support
The pattern setting unit with a pattern or a
dummy lens is set on this support.
Starts single tracing of the left rim.
Starts both tracings of the right and left rims.
Starts single-tracing of the right rim.
3-7
[Control panel for processing unit]
Selects a lens material: PLA (plastic), HPL
(high index plastic), PC (polycarbonate),
GLS (glass), ACR (acrylic resin), or TRX
(trivex). (For Type PLB, GLS cannot be selected.)
Selects processing conditions.
Grinding mode
setting
setting
MTL/CEL (ZYL) AUT
Auto processing
Guided processing MTL/CEL (ZYL) GUI
EX lens processing MTL/CEL (ZYL) EX
PNT/NYL
(blank)
Flat (rimless) edging
PNT
EX
EX lens flat edging
Auto grooving
NYL
AUT
(SX Express only)
Guided grooving
NYL
GUI
(SX Express only)
EX lens grooving
NYL
EX
(SX Express only)
3-8
Turns on/off the polishing mode. (This key
does not function for Type PC.)
Fixes a lens with the lens clamp or releases a
lens from the clamp.
Turns on/off the frame changing mode.
(LE-9000SX Express only)
Turns on/off the SFB mode.
Specifies the lens to be processed, right
(R) or left (L).
Starts retouching.
Recalls data traced by the tracing unit on the
display panel.
Changes the inputting form of layout data,
etc.
/
Enters prescription data, etc.
/
Moves the cursor.
Switches the screen in the following order.
Layout screeno MENU screeno Parameter exchange mode screen
This key does not function during lens
processing.*1
Stops processing.
Starts processing.
*1 When this key is pressed during the roughing process of beveling, the screen is switched between the
Bevel simulation screen and Layout screen.
3-9
[Display Panel]
• Layout screen
Data such as lens layout and prescription are inputted on this screen.
* On the actual Layout screen, the frame changing indication and soft processing mode indication
are not displayed at the same time.
Soft processing mode indication
Frame pupillary distance
Pupillary distance
Height of optical center
Size compensation value
Layout mode
SFB indication (LE-9000SX Express only)
Minimum lens
diameter
㧿㧻㧲㨀‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
Traced outline
Memory address
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧺㨅㧸㧭㨁㨀㧼㧻㧸㧲㧯㧾
Lens material
Frame material
Processing mode
R/L indication
Polishing indication
Frame changing indication
Up direction
Optical center
Rim center
Frame pupillary distance (FPD)
Input the distance between the right and left
rim centers. [30.00 - 99.50 mm (increment:
0.50 mm)] The rim centers are calculated by
the boxing system.
It is possible to input DBL by aligning the
cursor to FPD and pressing
.
Pupillary distance (PD)
Input the pupillary distance referred in the
prescription. [30.00 - 99.50 mm (increment:
0.50 mm)] It is also possible to input monocular PD (1/2PD).
DBL
FPD
Height of optical center ( )
Input the height from the rim center (boxing center) to the optical center.
[p15.0 - n15.0 mm (increment: 0.1 mm)]
3 - 10
Size compensation value (SIZ)
Indicates the compensation value for the
desired finished size in diameter, based on
the traced size of the frame or pattern (0.00).
[–9.95 - + 9.95 mm (increment: 0.05 mm)]
Layout mode
Indicates the selected layout mode [ACT
(active mode), BF (bifocal mode), or PAS
(passive mode)].
Memory address (MEM)
This address is used to store or to read traced
pattern data in the memory function. See “5.4
Storing and Recalling Traced Data (p. 5-7)”.
The indication of an address whose data
has already been stored is highlighted.
Lens material
The specified lens material [PLA (plastic),
HPL (high index plastic), PC (polycarbonate), GLS (glass), ACR (acrylic resin), or
TRX (trivex)] is indicated.
Frame material
[MTL (metal), CEL (celluloid)/ZYL, PNT
(two-point), or NYL (nylor)].
Processing mode
Indicates the processing mode.
[AUT, GUI, EX, or (Blank)]
(Blank) indicates flat edging without a groove.
Traced outline
Represents the plain figure of a traced outline in actual size.
Minimum lens diameter (MIN)
Indicates the minimum lens diameter required for processing. It appears when data
of to are entered.
SFB indication
(LE-9000SX Express only)
When the SFB mode is selected, or is
displayed.
ŸBoth lens edges are chamfered.
ŸRear lens edge is chamfered.
or can be set in “Safety Bevel Mode” of
the “Groove & SFB adjustment” parameter.
See “8.13.1 Setting the SFB mode and chamfering amount (p. 8-31)”.
Soft processing mode indication
(SOFT)
Indicates the soft processing mode.
Rim center
Represents the position of the rim center.
Optical center (
)
Represents the position of the optical center.
In the bifocal mode, the segment
appears
instead of the optical center.
Up direction ( )
Represents the direction in which the mark
on the blocked cup faces.
J
Polishing indication
Indicates the polishing mode.
Frame changing indication
Indicates the frame changing mode.
R/L indication
Indicates the selected lens to be processed
[R/L].
Top mark
3 - 11
• Bevel simulation screen
This screen is displayed while a bevel is simulated (when the tilting function is off).
Sectional view position line Edge’s thickest point
Bevel sectional view
Bevel curve
Bevel tip point
Frame curve
㧮%48㧦㧭㧡㧜
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧢
㧲%48㧦‫ޓ‬㧡㧜㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
Edge’s thinnest point
Tilt base position
This screen is displayed while a bevel is simulated (with the tilting function).
Bevel tilting amount
• Groove simulation screen
This screen is displayed while a groove is
simulated. (LE-9000SX Express only)
Groove sectional view
Groove curve
Groove dip point
Groove depth
Groove width
㧮%48㧦㧭㧠㧟
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜
㨀㧵㧸㨀㧦‫ ޓ‬㧜㧜
㧲%48㧦‫ޓ‬㧡㧜㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
Edge’s thickest point
Sectional view position line
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
㧳%48㧦㧭㧠㧟
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧰㧱㧼㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧢‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㨃㧵㧰㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧢㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
‫ޓ‬㧚
Edge’s thinnest point
3 - 12
Frame curve (F CRV)
Indicates the frame curve value measured
by the tracing unit.
Tilt base position
This is the base bevel position for determining the tilting amount.
Bevel tip point (PNT)
Indicates the amount by which the bevel is
moved, either backward or forward.
In the guided processing mode, align the
cursor to PNT. and change the value
with
or
to move the bevel forward or backward parallel to itself.
[m15.0 - o 15.0 mm (increment: 0.1
mm)]
Groove width (WID)
Indicates the groove width for nylor frames.
[0.6 - 1.2 mm (increment: 0.1 mm)]
Bevel curve (B CRV)
Indicates the bevel curve value.
In the guided processing mode, align the
cursor to B CRV and change the value
with
or
. The “A” mark on the
head of the value means that it is calculated by a computer and is the optimum
value.
Bevel sectional view
Represents the bevel section where the
sectional view position line is on the traced
outline.
Mark “” over the scale represents the
bevel tip point.
One graduation of the scale is equal to
0.2 mm.
Sectional view position line
Represents the position of the indicated bevel
section along the traced outline.
Bevel tilting amount (TILT)
Indicates the amount by which the bevel tip
point is shifted forward or backward.
Adjust the bevel tip point diagonally-opposite to the boxing center of the tilt base
position.
The value can be changed in 0.1 mm increments.
Groove depth (DEP)
Indicates the groove depth for nylor frames.
[0.0 - 0.8 mm (increment: 0.1 mm)]
Groove dip point (PNT)
Indicates the amount that the groove for nylor
frames is moved, either backward or forward.
In the guided grooving mode, align the
cursor to PNT . Change the value with
or
to move the groove forward
or backward parallel to itself.
[m15.0 - o 15.0 mm (increment: 0.1
mm)]
Groove curve (G CRV)
Indicates the groove curve value for nylor
frames.
In the guided grooving mode, align the
cursor to G CRV and change the value
with
or
. The “A” mark on the
head of the value means that it is calculated by a computer and is the optimum
value.
Groove sectional view
Represents the groove section where the
Sectional view position line is on the traced
outline.
The mark “” over the scale represents
the groove dip point.
One graduation of the scale is equal to
0.2 mm.
*
- apply to the LE-9000SX Express
only.
3 - 13
• MENU screen
This screen shows selections such as Process counter, Wheel dressing, Size adjustment, and Bevel adjustment. It is used to
perform maintenance or adjustment of the
edger.
• Parameter exchange mode screen
This is the screen to set parameters. On this
screen, the initial settings of size, pupillary distance (PD), height of the optical center, and
the parameter settings related to data communication are done.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖
‫ޓ‬
㧹
㧱
㧺
㨁
‫ޓ‬
㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧸㨑㨚㨓㨠㨔‫ޓ‬㧾㧦㧝㧢㧞㧚㧤㧟‫ޓ‬㧸㧦㧝㧢㧞㧚㧤㧟㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖㧱㨤㨑㨏㨡㨠㨑‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㨍㨞㨍㨙㨑㨠㨑㨞‫ޓ‬㨑㨤㨏㨔㨍㨚㨓㨑‫ޓ‬㨙㨛㨐㨑‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㨂㨑㨞㧚‫ޓ‬㧹㧭㧿㨀㧱㧾‫ޓ‬㨂㧝㧚㧜㧤㧚㧝㧝‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㨀㧾㧭㧯㧱㧾‫ޓ‬㨂㧞㧚㧜㧝‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㨀㨅㧼㧱‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㧸㧠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
ψ‫ޓ‬㧸㧭㧺㧳㨁㧭㧳㧱‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧱㧺㧳㧸㧵㧿㧴㧔㧿㧕‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧝㧕‫ޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨜㨞㨑㨟㨑㨠㧔㧼㧸㧭㧘㧹㨀㧸㧕㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧕‫ޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨜㨞㨑㨟㨑㨠㧔㧼㧸㧭㧘㧯㧱㧸㧕㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧟㧕‫ޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨜㨞㨑㨟㨑㨠㧔㧳㧸㧿㧘㧹㨀㧸㧕㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
• Barcode screen
This screen is available only when the edger
is connected to the optional barcode scanner. On this screen, traced outline and layout
data of a lens are stored and recalled. This
screen appears when a barcode is read using
the barcode scanner.
• Error code screen
When any abnormal condition is encountered, the instrument automatically stops and
an error code appears on the display panel.
See “B. ERROR CODE”.
‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧯㧻㧰㧱‫ޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧝㧞㧟㧠㧡㧢㧣㧤㧥㧜㧝㧞㧟㧠㧡‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧰㧭㨀㧭‫ޓ‬㨃㧾㧵㨀㧱‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧿㨀㧭㧾㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧰㧭㨀㧭‫ޓ‬㧾㧱㧭㧰‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧰㧭㨀㧭‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧯㧭㧺㧯㧱㧸‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧱㧾㧾㧻㧾‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧜㧞㧜㧢‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ‬
‫ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ‬
‫ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ ޓ‬
㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㨀㧭㧾㨀‫ޓ‬㧿㨃㧚
§4
OPERATING PROCEDURES
4.1 Operation Flow
Power-on
4.3 Tracings
o4.3.1 Tracing frames (p. 4-4)
o4.3.1.1 Tracing both rims (p. 4-4)
o4.3.1.2 Tracing a single rim (p. 4-5)
o4.3.1.3 Semiauto tracing (p. 4-5)
o4.3.1.4 Tracing goggle type frames (p. 4-6)
o4.3.2 Tracing the pattern (p. 4-7)
o4.3.3 Tracing the dummy lens (p. 4-8)
o4.3.4 Tracing during processing (p. 4-10)
o4.3.5 Stopping the tracing (p. 4-10)
o4.3.5.1 Stopping the frame tracing (p. 4-10)
o4.3.5.2 Stopping the pattern or dummy lens tracing (p. 4-10)
5.4 Storing and Recalling Traced Data
o5.4.1 When the edger is not connected to the barcode scanner (p. 5-8)
o5.4.2 When the edger is connected to the barcode scanner (p. 5-9)
4.4 Layouts
o4.4.1 Selecting processing conditions and inputting layout data (p. 4-11)
o4.4.2 Inputting the height from the lens outline (p. 4-14)
o4.4.2.1 Layout of bifocal lenses (p. 4-15)
o4.4.2.2 Layout of progressive power lenses (p. 4-16)
o4.4.3 Eye point layout (p. 4-17)
5.4 Storing and Recalling Traced Data
o5.4.1 When the edger is not connected to the barcode scanner (p. 5-8)
o5.4.2 When the edger is connected to the barcode scanner (p. 5-9)
4.5 Blocking Lenses
o4.5.1 Blocking in active mode (p. 4-18)
o 4.5.1.1 Blocking progressive power lenses (p. 4-18)
o4.5.2 Blocking in passive mode (p. 4-19)
o4.5.3 Blocking bifocal lenses (p. 4-20)
4-2
4.6 Processings
o4.6.1 Beveling (p. 4-21)
o4.6.1.1 Auto processing mode (p. 4-22)
o4.6.1.2 Guided processing mode (p. 4-25)
o4.6.1.3 Guided processing mode (tilting function) (p. 4-29)
o4.6.1.4 EX lens processing mode (p. 4-32)
o4.6.2 Flat (Rimless) edging (p. 4-36)
o4.6.2.1 Flat (Rimless) edging mode (p. 4-36)
o4.6.2.2 EX lens flat (rimless) edging mode (p. 4-39)
o4.6.2.3 Auto grooving mode (p. 4-41)
o4.6.2.4 Guided grooving mode (p. 4-43)
o4.6.2.5 EX lens grooving mode (p. 4-47)
o4.6.3 Other processings (p. 4-50)
o4.6.3.1 Processing for frame changing (p. 4-50)
4.7 Checking the Lens Size
o4.7.1 Checking the lens size (p. 4-60)
o4.7.2 Retouching lenses (p. 4-60)
4.8 Processing the Opposite Lens (p. 4-62)
End of processing
Power-OFF
4-3
4.2 Preparation
1. Plug the power cord into the wall outlet.
CAUTION
• Do not put too much load on one electrical outlet.
It may cause fire.
• Prongs of the plug must be fully inserted into the socket.
Incomplete connection may cause fire.
2. Turn the power on.
4-4
4.3 Tracings
4.3.1 Tracing frames
NOTE
• Perform dummy lens tracing for rims which possess low stiffness such as thin-rim
frames.
If the rim has low stiffness, distortion may occur and correct measurement cannot be
obtained.
4.3.1.1 Tracing both rims
This is the procedure to measure the outline of both rims as well as the FPD (Frame Pupillary
Distance).
1. Set frames into the tracing unit.
Rim clips
1) Open the cover of the tracing unit.
2) Set the top of the frames.
Draw the lower slider and set the frame top
between the rim clips on the upper slider.
3) Set the bottom of the frames.
Slowly release the lower slider, placing the
frame bottom between the rim clips on the
lower slider.
4) Bring the frames to the center of the tracing
unit.
2. Start tracing of both rims.
.
Press
Tracing is completed when the frames are released.
3. Recall traced data.
Press
.
The traced outline will appear on the display
panel.
4. Draw the lower slider to remove the frames.
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
4-5
NOTE
• If there is 1 mm or more of difference in circumference between the right and left rims,
the tracing error occurs (Retracing starts automatically and the LEDs beside
and
blink for a few seconds) and pressing
does not read traced data. In such a
case, perform single rim tracing.
4.3.1.2 Tracing a single rim
This is the procedure to trace one of the frame rims.
1. Set frames into the tracing unit.
See Step 1 of “4.3.1.1 Tracing both rims” (p. 4-4).
2. Press either
or
.
For tracing the rim for the left eye Ÿ Press
For tracing the rim for the right eye Ÿ Press
.
.
NOTE
• FPD (Frame Pupillary Distance) cannot be measured when a single rim is traced.
Measure it manually and input the data on the Layout screen.
4.3.1.3 Semiauto tracing
This is the procedure to bring the stylus into the bevel groove of the frame by hand when the
stylus cannot be set in the groove automatically.
1. Set frames into the tracing unit.
See Step 1 of “4.3.1.1 Tracing both rims” (p. 4-4).
*1
2. Hold
down for three seconds.
The stylus will move and stop at the tracing start position.
3. Use your hands to set the stylus into the groove.
*1 To trace a single rim, hold
or
down for three seconds.
4-6
4. Start tracing.
Press
.
When tracing is completed for one rim, the stylus will move to the other rim and stop at the
tracing start position.
5. Trace the other rim in the same manner as Steps 3 and 4.
4.3.1.4 Tracing goggle type frames
When unusually shaped frames such as goggles are traced, the stylus may come off the bevel
groove. In such a case, set only one rim between the rim clips and hold the frame temple of the
other side during tracing.
The following only describes the procedure for the right rim since either rim can be traced in the
same way.
1. Set the rim for the right eye horizontally to the tracing unit.
• Do not set the left rim.
• Hold the left temple of the frame to keep
the right rim horizontal.
2. Start tracing.
Press
.
NOTE
• Though the rim clips hold the right rim
securely, do not take your hand off the
temple.
If the frame moves during tracing,
precise measurement cannot be made.
<Non-tracing side>
Hold with fingers.
Do not set between
the rim clips.
<Tracing side>
Set the rim horizontally between the rim clips.
3. Recall traced data.
Press
.
The traced outline will appear on the display
panel.
4. Remove the frames from the tracing unit.
NOTE
• FPD (Frame Pupillary Distance) cannot be measured when goggle type frames are
traced.
Measure it manually and input the data on the Layout screen.
4-7
4.3.2 Tracing the pattern
White button
1. Set a pattern onto the pattern setting unit.
1) Set a pattern while pressing the white button
on the pattern setting unit.
Make sure that the pattern is pushed as far
as it will go.
Fit the pattern as the following figures show.
Pattern
Pattern setting unit
<For right pattern>
<For left pattern>
Nasal side
Temporal side
Temporal side
Nasal side
2) Release the white button to lock the pattern.
2. Set the pattern setting unit to the tracing unit.
1) Open the cover of the tracing unit.
Pattern setting unit support
2) Set the pattern setting unit to the tracing unit.
Draw the lower slider and set the pattern
setting unit onto the pattern setting unit
support.
Fit the pins of the pattern setting unit to the
two circular holes on the pattern setting unit
support.
The pattern setting unit is fixed to the pattern
setting unit support by magnet.
Pins
Circular holes
4-8
3. Press either
or
.
For tracing the right pattern Ÿ Press
For tracing the left pattern Ÿ Press
.
.
The tracing pin comes out and then tracing
starts.
4. When tracing is completed, remove the
pattern setting unit.
When tracing is completed, the tracing pin will
be automatically stored.
It is easy to remove the unit from the left side.
NOTE
• FPD (Frame Pupillary Distance) cannot be measured when a pattern is traced.
Measure it manually and input the data on the Layout screen.
4.3.3 Tracing the dummy lens
1. Block the convex side of a dummy lens with a lens cup.
1) Mark the estimated center of a dummy lens
with a lensmeter.
Set the dummy lenses mounted in the frames
and make sure that the frames are in contact
with the lens table to mark the lenses.
2) Affix the provided double-coated adhesive
tape to the lens cup.
Lens table
4-9
3) Block the convex side of the dummy lens
with the lens cup, using the centering device.
Align the marks on the dummy lens to the
direction of the groove on the lens cup to
block it.
2. Set the lens cup onto the pattern setting unit.
Fit the lens cup while pressing the white button
of the pattern setting unit.
Lens cup
<Convex side of dummy lens>
White button
Pattern setting unit
<For left-eye lens>
Temporal side
<For right-eye lens>
Nasal side
Nasal side
Temporal side
3. Trace the dummy lens in the same manner as Steps 2 - 4 of “4.3.2 Tracing pattern” (p. 47).
However, press
to trace the right-eye lens, and press
to trace the left-eye lens.
NOTE
• FPD (Frame Pupillary Distance) cannot be measured when a dummy lens is traced.
Measure it manually and input the data on the Layout screen.
Instead of inputting FPD, you may also use the eye point layout. See “4.4.3 Eye
point layout” (p. 4-17).
4 - 10
4.3.4 Tracing during processing
It is possible to perform the next tracing during processing.
Set frames and press
.
After processing is completed, press
the screen.
. Traced outline data will be read and displayed on
4.3.5 Stopping the tracing
To stop tracing, follow the instructions below.
4.3.5.1 Stopping the frame tracing
1. Press
.
The stylus will return to its original position and the frames will be released.
4.3.5.2 Stopping the pattern or dummy lens tracing
1. Press
.
2. Remove the pattern setting unit.
The tracing pin will be stored.
4 - 11
4.4 Layouts
4.4.1 Selecting processing conditions and inputting layout data
1. Select processing conditions.
1) Specify the material of a lens with
.
*2
[PLA (plastic), HPL (high index plastic),
PC (polycarbonate), GLS*3 (glass), ACR
(acrylic resin), or TRX*4 (trivex)]
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓ ޓ‬㧾
CAUTION
1)
2)
3)
4)
• Be sure to specify the correct lens material.
Otherwise, the useful life of the processing wheel may be shortened.
.
2) Select beveling or flat (rimless) edging with
[MTL, CEL (ZYL), PNT, NYL]
Flat (rimless) edging Ÿ Select [PNT] or [NYL] suited to the frame form.
Beveling Ÿ Select [MTL] or [CEL] suited to the lens material.
3) Select a processing mode.
The processing mode can be selected with
or
.
See the table on the right.
For adjusting the bevel or groove position
Ÿ Select the GUI mode.
For processing EX lenses
Ÿ Select the EX mode.
For processing cataract lenses
Ÿ Select the GUI mode (rear surface).
Processing
type
Processing mode
setting
setting
Auto processing
MTL/CEL (ZYL) AUT
Guided processing MTL/CEL (ZYL)
GUI
Beveling
EX lens processing MTL/CEL (ZYL)
EX
Flat (rimless) edging
PNT/NYL
(blank)
EX lens flat edging
PNT
EX
Auto grooving
NYL
AUT
Flat edging (SX Express only)
Guided grooving
NYL
GUI
(SX Express only)
EX grooving
NYL
EX
(SX Express only)
For beveling, select the optimum mode suited to the lens material.
Processing mode
Type of lens
Monofocal lens
Progressive power
Bifocal
Special lenses
Cataract
EX
AUT
䃁
䃁
䃁
GUI
CRV FRNT REAR RATIO
䃁
䂾
䃁
䃁
䃁
EX
䂾
䃁
: Optimum mode, {: Recommended mode
*2 Select HPL when processing plastic lenses which produce burrs and chips easily.
*3 Glass lenses cannot be processed with Type PLB.
*4 To process lenses that melt easily from heat such as a trivex lens, select “TRX”.
4 - 12
NOTE
• EX lenses cannot be processed in the auto processing mode and guided processing
mode.
Process an EX lens after checking the bevel position or groove position in the EX
lens processing mode.
• Cataract lenses cannot be processed in the auto processing mode.
Process a cataract lens with the curve profiling the rear surface while checking the
bevel position or groove position in the guided processing mode.
If a cataract lens has a large dilation on its front convex surface, a lens measurement
error may occur. In such a case, process the lens in the EX lens processing mode.
4) Specify the lens to be processed, either R (right) or L (left) with
.
to turn on the polishing mode. (Only for PL4, PLB and PLB-2R. With Type
5) Press
PL4, this function is available only when flat edging is selected.)
Press
again to cancel the polishing mode.
6) Press
to turn on the SFB mode. (LE-9000SX Express only)
lights up, and or is displayed on the screen.
The LED beside
2. As necessary, change the setting of the layout mode.
Align the cursor (C
) to the layout mode indication and select the desired mode with
.
See [ACT (Active mode), BF (Bifocal mode), PAS (Passive mode)] of “A.3 Selection of
Blocking” (p. A-4).
3. Input each item of data of the lens layout.
Input values of FPD*5, PD and height of the
optical center.
1) Input the PD value on the prescription.
Align the cursor (C
) to PDC with
or
, and input a PD value with
.*6
DBL
Height of optical
center ( )
PD
or
FPD
*5 It is possible to input DBL.
This is the inputting method of the distance between the nasal ends of the right and left rims.
1) Align the cursor to FPD and press
.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧢
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧰㧮㧸㧦㧝㧞㧠㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
FPD changes to DBL.
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
2) Input a DBL value with
or
.
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
4 - 13
2) Input the height of the optical center.
Align the cursor to
and input the
height of the optical center from the rim
center with
or
.*7
1)
2)
3)
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧢
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
3) To correct the finished lens size, align the cursor to SIZ and input the corrective value with
or
.
e.g. +1.00: The finished size becomes 1 mm larger in diameter.
The minimum lens diameter required for process is displayed on the top right of the screen
at MIN.
NOTE
• This value is provided just for reference purposes. It is recommended to use a lens
which is 2 - 3 mm longer in diameter for cases where the optical center and the center
of the lens are not the same.
[When the mark of the optical center becomes
When the layout is input, the mark of the optical
center may change from
to
.
indicates that the lens adapter or lens clamp
may be in contact with the processing wheel.
Replace the lens adapter, lens clamp and lens
cup with the ones for half-eye lenses.
See “4.6.3.2 Processing half-eye lenses” (p. 453).
]
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧢
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
*6 It is also possible to input PD by monocular PD. This is the inputting method of the bridge
center to the eye point distance for the right and left lenses separately.
1) Align the cursor to PDC and press
PDC changes to 1/2PD.
.
2) Input a monocular PD value with
.
or
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧢
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧛㧼㧰㧦㧟㧝㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
*7 It is also possible to input the height of the optical center from the bottom of the lens outline.
See “4.4.2 Inputting height from a lens outline” (p. 4-14).
4 - 14
4.4.2 Inputting the height from the lens outline
1. Select an inputting form.
and select either of
Align the cursor to
the following with
.
PD : Height from the optical center straight
down to the point on the lens outline.
BT : Height from the point level with the
optical center straight down to the lowest
point on the lens outline.
2. Input the height of the optical center.
e.g. If the height from the optical center straight
down to the point on the outline is 23.5 mm:
PD : 23.5
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧤
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧞㧠㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧤
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧞㧟㧡‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
PD
e.g. If the height from the point level with the
optical center straight down to the lowest
point on the lens outline is 25.8 mm:
BT : 25.8
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧤
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧮㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧞㧡㧤‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
BT
4 - 15
4.4.2.1 Layout of bifocal lenses
1. Select processing conditions.
See “4.4.1 Selecting processing conditions and inputting layout data” (p. 4-11).
2. Select BFC (bifocal) for the layout mode.
3. Input the prescribed PD for near vision (PD
of segment) at PDC.
4. Align the cursor to
or 㧮㨀 with
.
and select 㧼㧰
5. Input the segment at the center of the top line.
PD : Height from the center point on the top
line of the segment straight down to the
point on the lens outline.
BT : Height from the point level with the
center of the segment on the top line
straight down to the lowest point on the
lens outline.
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧮㧲‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧣㧢
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧡㧠㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧝㧣㧠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧮㧲‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
PD
For the blocking procedure, see “4.5.3 Blocking bifocal lenses” (p. 4-20).
BT
4 - 16
4.4.2.2 Layout of progressive power lenses
1. Select processing conditions.
See “4.4.1 Selecting processing conditions and inputting layout data” (p. 4-11).
2. Select ACT (Active) for the layout mode.
3. Input the prescribed PD at PD .
4. Input the height of the eye point marked on
the dummy lens.
See “4.4.2 Inputting height from a lens outline”
(p. 4-14).
For the blocking procedure, see “4.5.1.1
Blocking progressive power lenses” (p. 4-18).
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧢
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧞㧠㧣‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
4 - 17
4.4.3 Eye point layout
This is the form to determine the optical center
by inputting the distances to the nasal and
bottom sides of the lens outline.
This form serves to specify the position of the
eye point, which is marked on dummy lenses,
as the optical center.
PD
mo
1. Align the cursor to FPD and press
twice.
The screen changes as shown in the right figure.
The mark “ ” in the traced outline shows the
position of the eye point.
The screen with FPD will return if
is
pressed again.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧞㧢㧡‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧞㧟㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
2. Input the distance from the eye point to the
point level with it on the nasal side of the
lens outline at mo .
3. Input the height from the eye point straight
down to the point on the lens outline at
㧼㧰 .
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧣㧜
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧞㧟㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧞㧠㧡‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
4 - 18
4.5 Blocking Lenses
The blocking position of the suction cup varies with the layout mode (Active mode, Bifocal
mode, Passive mode).
4.5.1 Blocking in active mode
1. Mark at the optical center of a lens with a
lensmeter.
Cylinder axis
When a lens has cylinder power, align the
cylinder axis angle of the lens to the prescription
value before marking.
It is recommended to use the NIDEK Auto
lensmeter for this purpose.
2. Block the convex surface of the lens with a
suction cup.
The cup has the blocking direction as shown
with the top mark.
Be careful not to block the wrong side up,
especially for dual-tone colored lenses.
<Up side>
It is recommended to use NIDEK centering
device Model CE-1 for blocking.
NOTE
• To process a polycarbonate lens, be sure to use a lens cup in order to prevent the cup
from moving during processing.
4.5.1.1 Blocking progressive power lenses
Block a lens with a centering device on the eye
point for far vision, which is printed on the lens.
Eye point for far vision
4 - 19
4.5.2 Blocking in passive mode
This is the procedure to block at the rim center
by decentering the optical center.
When PAS (Passive) is selected for the layout
mode, how much and in what direction the
optical center should be decentered appears at
PAS
after the lens layout is finished.
The on-the-frame-center blocking can be
achieved by decentering the optical center as
indicated.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧣㧟
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧠㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧡㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
2#5‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧡㧜
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
2 mm
1. Mark at the optical center of a lens with a
lensmeter.
See Step 1 of “4.5.1 Blocking in active mode”
(p. 4-18).
2. Block the convex surface of the lens with a
suction cup.
Decenter the optical center in accordance with
the indication at PAS
.
e.g. PAS : o 2.0
: p 5.0
Decenter the optical center 2.0 mm to the right
and 5.0 mm to the bottom to block.
5 mm
Marked point
<When using the NIDEK centering device CE-1>
NOTE
• To process a polycarbonate lens, be sure to use a lens cup in order to prevent the cup
from moving during processing.
4 - 20
4.5.3 Blocking bifocal lenses
When BF (bifocal) is selected for the layout mode, a lens is blocked at the specified values of
ABOVE and OUTSIDE positions from the top line center of the segment.
Be sure to block the lens as instructed below since the instrument processes the lens with the
specified values. See “4.4.2.1 Layout of bifocal lenses” (p. 4-15).
Block a lens at the position 5 mm above and
5 mm outside from the top line center of the
segment with a lens cup (When using the
NIDEK centering device CE-1).
5 mm
5 mm
5 mm above
<When using the NIDEK centering device CE-1>
5 mm outside
NOTE
• The edger is factory-configured so that a lens is blocked at the position 5 mm above
and 5 mm outside from the top line center of the segment with the NIDEK centering
device CE-1. (The provided layout mark of segment on the screen of the CE-1 allows
an operator to easily block a lens at 5 mm above and 5 mm outside.) When using the
centering device of another manufacturer, it is possible to specify appropriate values
to the device. See “5.2 Parameter Settings” (p. 5-2).
4 - 21
4.6 Processings
The processing mode is specified by
and
.
See Step 1 of “4.4.1 Selecting processing conditions and inputting layout data” (p. 4-11).
Processing mode
setting
Auto processing mode (see p. 4-22)
Beveling Guided processing mode (see p. 4-25)
EX lens processing mode (see p. 4-32)
Flat (rimless) edging mode (see p. 4-36)
EX lens flat (rimless) edging mode (see p. 4-39)
Flat
Auto grooving mode (see p. 4-41)(LE-9000SX Express only)
edging
Guided grooving mode (see p. 4-43)(LE-9000SX Express only)
EX lens grooving mode (see p. 4-47)(LE-9000SX Express only)
To turn on the SFB mode, press
MTL/CEL (ZYL)
MTL/CEL (ZYL)
MTL/CEL (ZYL)
PNT/NYL
PNT
NYL
NYL
NYL
setting
AUT
GUI
EX
(blank)
EX
AUT
GUI
EX
. (LE-9000SX Express only)
In addition, the edge will be polished by pressing
PL4, this function is available only in flat edging.)
for Type PL4, PLB, or PLB-2R. (For Type
4.6.1 Beveling
For beveling, select the optimum mode suited to the lens material.
Processing mode
Type of lens
Monofocal lens
Special lenses
Progressive power
Bifocal
Cataract
EX
AUT
䃁
䃁
䃁
CRV
GUI
FRNT REAR RATIO
䂾*
䃁
䃁
䃁
䃁
EX
8
䂾
䃁
: Optimum mode, {: Recommended mode
NOTE
• EX lenses cannot be processed in the auto processing mode and guided processing
mode.
Process an EX lens in the EX lens processing mode. See “4.6.1.4 EX lens processing
mode” (p. 4-32).
• Cataract lenses cannot be processed in the auto processing mode.
Process a cataract lens with the curve profiling the rear surface in the guided processing
mode. See “4.6.1.2 Guided processing mode” (p. 4-25).
If a cataract lens has a large dilation on its front convex surface, a lens measurement
error may occur. In such a case, process the lens in the EX lens processing mode.
*8 Specify the ratio, following the reference ratios below.
• Low power plus monofocal lens o 5 : 5
• Middle and high power plus monofocal lens, Low power minus monofocal lens o 4 : 6 or 5 : 5
• Medium power minus monofocal lens o 3 : 7 or 4 : 6
• High power minus monofocal lens o 3 : 7
4 - 22
4.6.1.1 Auto processing mode
In this mode, a computer-calculated bevel is produced on the lens edge.
1. Check the processing conditions.
: MTL or CEL (ZYL)
: AUT
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
2. Set a lens to the adapter in the processing
unit.
Top mark
Align the top mark (•) on the suction cup with
that of the adapter and insert the suction cup
firmly. Then, press
to fix the lens.
Top mark
NOTE
• To attach a suction cup or lens cup to the adapter, align the top mark of the cup with the
mark on the adapter and fully insert the cup.
If not, correct processing cannot be done. As for the lens cup, if the attached lens cup
to the adapter is upside down, the cup cannot be held securely by the adapter.
[Positions of the top mark]
Top mark
Top mark
Suction cup
Top mark
Standard adapter
Top mark
Adapter for half-eye lenses
Lens cup
Top mark
Lens cup for half-eye lenses
CAUTION
• Be careful not to get your fingers caught when chucking (fixing) a lens.
4 - 23
3. Close the soundproof cover.
Processing does not start even if
is pressed unless the soundproof cover is closed.
WARNING
• Be sure to keep the soundproof cover closed during processing.
If the soundproof cover is opened during processing, the instrument does not stop.
Spray including processing waste may cause eye damage.
4. Start processing.
Press
Bevel section
.
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
Lens shape measurement
‫ޓ‬
p
㧮%48㧦㧭‫ޓ‬㧡㧜
‫ޓ‬㧚
Roughing
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓ‬
[The screen changes to the Bevel simulation
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧲%48㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧡㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
screen.]
p
Sectional view position line
Finishing
p
Polishing (Only when
is selected by Type PLB or PLB-2R.)
p
Chamfering (Only when
is selected.) (LE-9000SX Express only)
p
Processings are complete. [The Layout screen returns.]
When the screen changes to the Bevel simulation screen in Step , the sectional view position
line rotates along the traced outline, and the bevel section at that position will be shown.
A. The glass lens contact position during roughing can be moved laterally. (except for Type
PLB)
By changing the position where the glass lens contacts the roughing wheel, the partial wear of
the roughing wheel for glass lenses will be unlikely to occur.
To adjust the contact position, press
during roughing.
:
:
or
m
o
The contact position with the wheel will
shift to the right.
The contact position with the wheel will
shift to the left.
Roughing wheel for glass lenses
4 - 24
NOTE
• Be sure to move a glass lens within the roughing wheel for glass lenses.
If the glass lens contacts the other wheels, it may damage the wheels or the glass lens
may crack.
• The adjusted contact position with the wheel is effective only during roughing of one
lens. After lens processing is over, the contact position with the wheel will return to its
original position.
• Setting the “Reverse GLS Grind” parameter to “Exec” roughly processes a lens by
automatically changing the position to be contacted with the roughing wheel from side
to side.
B. It is possible to adjust the plastic lens contact position laterally during roughing.
If a sharply-warped or high minus plastic lens is detached from the roughing wheel, change the
position where the plastic lens contacts the roughing wheel.
To adjust the contact position, press
during roughing.
:
:
or
m
o
The contact position with the wheel will
shift to the right.
The contact position with the wheel will
shift to the left.
NOTE
Roughing wheel for plastic lenses
• The adjusted contact position with the wheel is effective only when roughing one lens.
After lens processing is over, the contact position with the wheel will return to its
original position.
5. Take the finished lens off.
1) Open the soundproof cover.
2) Press
to take the lens off.
WARNING
• Open the soundproof cover after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete stop.
• Release the chuck by pressing
after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete
stop.
If the chuck is released before the wheels have stopped completely and a lens is dropped,
it may contact the turning wheels and its scattering may cause injury.
4 - 25
4.6.1.2 Guided processing mode
This is a mode to input the value of the bevel curve and bevel position manually.
1. Check the processing conditions.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
: MTL or CEL (ZYL)
: GUI
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
2. Set a lens to the adapter in the processing
unit.
See Step 2 of “4.6.1.1 Auto processing mode”.
3. Close the soundproof cover.
Processing does not start even if
is pressed unless the soundproof cover is closed.
WARNING
• Be sure to keep the soundproof cover closed during processing.
If the soundproof cover is opened during processing, the instrument does not stop.
Spray including processing waste may cause eye damage.
Sectional view position line
4. Press
.
Lens shape measurement
p
The screen changes to the Bevel Simulation
screen and the instrument stops.
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
%48㧦㧭‫ޓ‬㧡㧜
㧮%48
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧲%48㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧡㧜㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
5. Simulate the bevel section at each point of
the traced outline on the screen.
:
The sectional view position line rotates counterclockwise.
:
The sectional view position line rotates clockwise.
To stop the line movement, press
or
again.
: The sectional view position line jumps to the point where the lens edge is thinnest ( )
and thickest (J) alternately.
J
4 - 26
6. Adjust the bevel position.
(a) Changing the bevel position only at the part where the edge is thick
1) Align the cursor to B CRV.
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
㧮%48㧦㧭‫ޓ‬㧡㧜
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓ‬
㧲%48㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧡㧜㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
‫ޓ‬㧚
2) Change the bevel curve value to move the
bevel position toward the front or rear
surface of the lens.
: The bevel curve turns sharply.
: The bevel curve turns slightly.
As the curve value is changed, the bevel
position moves from the edge’s thinnest
point as the base (The ratio 5:5 will be
maintained). The shifted amount of the
bevel is maximum at the lens edge’s thickest
point. Change the bevel curve, watching the
bevel sectional view at the lens edge’s
thickest point.
The bevel curve
turns slightly.
The bevel curve
turns sharply.
<Convex lens>
The bevel curve
turns slightly.
The bevel curve
turns sharply.
<Concave lens>
The curve value with the “A” mark on the head shows that it is a computer-calculated value.
This value produces the same bevel curve that is processed in the auto processing mode.
: The front base curve (FRNT), rear base curve (REAR), or ratio will be selected.
o Specified curve value oFront base curve o
(curve profiling
the front surface
of a lens)
Rear base curve o Ratio
(curve profiling
the rear surface
of a lens)
NOTE
• The curve value can only be selected within a range where the bevel is on the lens
edge. Therefore, the bevel will never be off the edge, and a single-sided bevel will
never be produced even if the bevel curve value is changed.
• When processing a cataract lens, select the rear base curve (REAR) for the curve value.
The specified value, front base curve, or ratio is not appropriate for proper beveling.
4 - 27
(b) Changing the position of the whole bevel parallel to itself
1) Press
to simulate the bevel at the point
where the edge is thinnest ( ).
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
J
2) Align the cursor to PNT.
‫ޓ‬
㧮%48㧦㧭‫ޓ‬㧡㧜
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧢‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓ‬
㧲%48㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧡㧜㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
㧚
3) Change the bevel tip point value to move
the bevel position toward the front or rear
surface of the lens.
m
o
: The bevel moves toward the front
surface.
: The bevel moves toward the rear
The bevel moves
The bevel moves
surface.
toward the rear
toward the front
surface.
surface.
m next to the value shows that the bevel
was moved toward the front surface. o next
to the value shows that the bevel was moved
toward the rear surface.
e.g.
B CRV:
A5.0
PNT:
o0.6
This shows that the bevel was moved 0.6 mm toward the rear surface parallel to itself while
the bevel curve value was 5.0.
NOTE
• In order to avoid the bevel being off the lens edge, be sure to watch the simulation at
the thinnest position while changing the value.
Distinct from changing the bevel curve value, it is possible to specify a bevel tip
point which produces a single-sided bevel.
7. Check the bevel section.
1) Press
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
to turn off the cursor.
2) Simulate the whole bevel to see if the
desired bevel is obtained. See Step 5 (p. 425).
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
%48㧦㧭‫ޓ‬㧡㧜
㧮%48
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧢‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧲%48㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧡㧜㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
8. Repeat Steps 5 - 7 until the desired bevel is obtained.
4 - 28
9. Start processing.
Press
.
Roughing
p
Finishing
p
Polishing (Only when
is selected by Type PLB or PLB-2R.)
p
Chamfering (Only when
is selected.) (LE-9000SX Express only)
p
Processings are complete. [The Layout screen returns.]
10. Remove the lens.
WARNING
• Open the soundproof cover after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete stop.
• Release the chuck by pressing
after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete
stop.
If the chuck is released before the wheels have stopped completely and a lens is dropped,
it may contact the turning wheels and its scattering may cause injury.
• It is also possible to switch the processing mode to the guided processing mode even in the
middle of the auto processing.
To do so, press
while roughing is being processed.
After roughing is completed, the instrument goes into the guided processing mode and stops
temporarily.
• While the Simulation screen is shown, it can be changed to the Layout screen by pressing
. The Layout screen here, however, is just a reminder and its data cannot be changed.
(The switches except for
do not function.)
Pressing
again will return to the Simulation screen, but once processing has started, the
screen cannot be changed any more.
4 - 29
4.6.1.3 Guided processing mode (tilting function)
The tilting function of the bevel is available in the guided processing mode, in which the bevel curve can
be specified manually.
If the difference in width between the edge’s thickest point and thinnest point is extreme, the
mounted lens will not look nice. The appearance of the lens will improve if the bevel is tilted.
To use the tilting function, set the “TILT Function” parameter to “Exec”. See “5.2 Parameter
Settings” (p.5-2).
1. Select processing conditions, chuck a lens, and measure the lens shape.
After the lens shape measurement, the screen changes to the Simulation screen, and the instrument
stops.
See Steps 1 - 5 of “4.6.1.2 Guided processing mode” (p. 4-25).
2. Adjust the bevel position.
1) Press
or
to move the sectional view
position line to the base position, and check
the bevel sectional view at that point.
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
㧮%48㧦㧭‫ޓ‬㧠㧟
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㨀㧵㧸㨀㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧚
㧜㧜‫ޓ‬
㧲%48㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧡㧜㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
‫ޓ‬㧚
The most appropriate tilt base position is the thinnest point of the lens edge, or a diagonallyopposite point (through the frame center) to where the bevel tip point is to be moved.
2) Align the cursor to TILT with
or
,
to determine the tilt base
and press
position.
The tilt base position mark (F) will move
to the end of the sectional view position line.
After that, the line will automatically skip
to the diagonally-opposite point.
If the value is already input at “TILT”,
pressing
resets the value to 0.0.
In this case, press
base position.
again to set the tilt
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
㧮%48㧦㧭‫ޓ‬㧠㧟
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㨀㧵㧸㨀㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧚
㧜㧜‫ޓ‬
㧲%48㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧡㧜㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
‫ޓ‬㧚
4 - 30
3) Align the cursor to B CRV with
or
, and set the bevel curve value with
or
.
Press
or
once to delete A (Auto-curve), and then set the desired value.
e.g.) A4.3: A bevel position is computer-calculated from the ratio.
4.3: A bevel position is calculated from the spherical curve of the lens.
For a curve value with A, the bevel position is calculated from Ratio. For a curve value
without A, the bevel position is calculated from the spherical curve of the lens.
With the tilting function, the bevel position is adjusted according to the spherical curve
value of the lens as a base. For the reason, if the ratio curve value with A is set, the set tilting
value may differ from the actual tilting amount of the bevel. As the difference between the
ratio curve and spherical curve becomes wider, the difference in the tilting amount will
substantially increase.
4) As necessary, align the cursor to PNT with
or
.
or
, and adjust the bevel position with
Ÿ The whole bevel moves toward the rear surface parallel to itself.
Ÿ The whole bevel moves toward the front surface parallel to itself.
m next to the value shows that the bevel was moved forward.
o next to the value shows that the bevel was moved backward.
5) Align the cursor to TILT with
or
, and set the tilting amount with
or
.
“TILT” shows the tilting amount of the bevel tip point at the diagonally-opposite point to
the tilt base position.
Ÿ The bevel moves toward the rear surface.
Ÿ The bevel moves toward the front surface.
+ next to the value shows that the bevel was moved backward.
– next to the value shows that the bevel was moved forward.
6) Simulate the whole bevel to see if the desired bevel is obtained.
Delete the cursor with
or
, and check the bevel sectional view, by rotating the bevel
sectional view position line with
or
.
will move the sectional view position line to:
Pressing
Ÿ Tilt base position (F) Ÿ Diagonally-opposite point to the tilt base position Ÿ
Edge’s thinnest point ( ) Ÿ Edge’s thickest point (J)Ÿ in order
J
7) Repeat Steps 3) to 6) until the desired bevel is obtained.
Press
to disable the set values for the bevel and to stop the instrument. All the set
values will be canceled, and the Layout screen will return.
4 - 31
3. Restart processing.
Press
to restart processing.
If the bevel is completely off the lens edge, two short beeps will be produced. The sectional
view position line automatically rotates along the whole traced outline and the bevel section at
each position will be shown.
Change the setting as necessary. To process the lens without changing the setting, press
again.
This function works when more than half of the bevel is off the lens edge.
After roughing and finishing, processing sequences are over. The Layout screen returns.
4. Remove the lens.
WARNING
• Open the soundproof cover after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete stop.
• Release the chuck by pressing
after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete
stop.
If the chuck is released before the wheels have not stopped completely and a lens is
dropped, it may contact the turning wheels and its scattering may cause injury.
5. When subsequently the other lens is processed by switching R or L, the former setting for
the lens will be shown on the screen.
If one lens is processed with the tilting function, the Bevel simulation screen will automatically
appear after the other lens is processed by switching R or L. The former values such as the tilt
base position, amount of tilting bevel, bevel curve and bevel tip point are initially displayed.
NOTE
• If the front base curve (FRNT), rear base curve (REAR) or Ratio is selected as the
bevel curve, the amount of bevel tilting will be ignored. The lens will be processed in
the normal guided processing mode.
• With the tilting function, the bevel curve will be calculated from the spherical curve of
the lens. For the reason, the bevel may be off the edge even though the closer value to
the auto-curve value is set.
• If the lens is processed with the bevel curve value with A on condition that the “Tilt
Function” parameter is set at “Exec”, the parameter setting will be ineffective, and the
function of bevel tilting does not work.
4 - 32
4.6.1.4 EX lens processing mode
This mode serves to process EX lenses. In this mode, beveling which has the curve profiling the rear
surface is performed.
As for a cataract lens which has a large dilation on its front convex surface, process a lens in the
EX lens processing mode if the lens processing cannot be performed in the guided processing
mode (rear base curve) due to the lens shape measurement error.
NOTE
• Use a lens cup for blocking.
A suction cup cannot hold the convex surface of a lens securely. The cup may move
during blocking.
1. Check the processing conditions.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
: MTL or CEL (ZYL)
: EX
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧱㨄‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
2. Set a lens to the adapter in the processing unit.
See Step 2 of “4.6.1.1 Auto processing mode”.
3. Close the soundproof cover.
Processing does not start even if
is pressed unless the soundproof cover is closed.
WARNING
• Be sure to keep the soundproof cover closed during processing.
If the soundproof cover is opened during processing, the instrument does not stop.
Spray including processing waste may cause eye damage.
4. Press
.
Lens shape measurement
p
The screen changes to the Bevel simulation screen and the instrument stops.
4 - 33
5. Simulate the bevel section at each point of the outline on the screen.
: The sectional view position line rotates counterclockwise.
: The sectional view position line rotates clockwise.
To stop the line movement, press
or
again.
: The sectional view position line jumps to the point that the lens edge is thinnest ( ) and
thickest ( ) alternately.
If the bevel position needs to be changed:
Follow the procedures from Step 6 of “4.6.1.2 Guided processing mode” (p. 4-26) to change
the bevel tip point (PNT).
NOTE
• As to the curve value, do not change it but leave it as the rear base curve (REAR).
The specified curve, front base curve, or ratio is not appropriate for proper beveling.
6. Start processing.
Press
.
Roughing
p
Finishing
p
Polishing (Only when
is selected by Type PLB or PLB-2R.)
p
Chamfering (Only when
is selected.) (LE-9000SX Express only)
p
Processings are complete. [The Layout screen returns.]
7. Remove the lens.
WARNING
• Open the soundproof cover after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete stop.
• Release the chuck by pressing
after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete
stop.
If the chuck is released before the wheels have not stopped completely and a lens is
dropped, it may contact the turning wheels and its scattering may cause injury.
4 - 34
{ Concrete example of the tilting function
The procedures of processing EX lenses with the tilting function are described.
To use the tilting function, it is necessary to set the “TILT Function” parameter to “Exec”. See
“5.2 Parameter Settings” (p. 5-2).
EX lenses have the distance part on their upper half and the near part on their lower half as
shown in the figure, and the difference between the top edge width and the bottom one is wide.
Besides, since there is a difference in level between the distance part and near part, the appearance
of the mounted lenses is not nice if the lens is processed in the beveling mode.
In processing an EX lens with the tilting function, the initial bevel curve value will not be the
rear base curve (REAR); The bevel is calculated from the spherical curve which is the same with
the auto-curve value. Then the EX lens will automatically be processed in the guided processing
mode.
The figure by the dotted line illustrates the side view of the EX lens which
is processed with the tilting function. As illustrated, the bevel on the thick
upper part of the lens is moved toward the front surface of the lens in the
range that the bevel barely remains at the edge’s thinnest point.
The following describes the procedures for processing an EX lens with a
nice appearance by adjusting the bevel position on the upper part to the
front surface with the tilting function.
Setting the tilt base position
Figure of EX lens
Align the sectional view position line to the
position adjacent to the straight down from the
frame center as shown on the right-hand screen.
Then move the bevel position backward as
much as possible. This is for tilting the bevel
on the upper edge as much as possible. If the
lens edge is thick enough, it is not necessary to
move the bevel position, but leave the bevel
around the middle of the edge. The bevel
position will be the tilt base position. Align
the cursor to TILT and press
.
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
㧮%48㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧠㧟
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧝㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㨀㧵㧸㨀㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧚
㧜㧜‫ޓ‬
㧲%48㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧡㧜㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
‫ޓ‬㧚
Set the tilt base position near the point
straight down from the frame center.
4 - 35
Inputting tilting amount
The bevel position has been moved backward in Step though the upper part of the edge is
thick. Move the bevel forward by inputting a minus value to “TILT”. In doing so, always
observe the bevel on the boundary between the distance and near parts. In most cases, the
edge’s thinnest point is on the boundary. Adjust the tilting amount within a range that at least a
bevel on either front or rear side remains.
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
㧮%48㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧠㧟
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧝㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㨀㧵㧸㨀㧦‫ޓ‬㧙㧜㧤‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧲%48㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧡㧜㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
‫ޓ‬㧚
Boundary between the distance
part and near part
See the following in adjusting the bevel position at each point. To reset all the settings, reset
“TILT” and “PNT” to 0.0, and put “A” (automatically-calculated curve value) at the head of the
curve value. This will allow an operator to reset the bevel position and tilting amount from the
beginning.
Position adjacent to the point straight down
from the frame center (tilt base position)
• If the lens edge is thin, change the bevel tip
point (PNT) to move the bevel backward as
much as possible.
• If the lens has enough width, place the bevel
tip point at 1/3 from the rear surface of the
edge.
• Do not input the tilting amount, and leave
“TILT” to 0.0.
Upper position (diagonally-opposite point to
the tilt base point)
• Move the bevel position forward as much
as possible in the range that the bevel on the
edge thinnest point remains on the edge.
• Increase the tilting amount (TILT) in the
minus direction to tilt the bevel toward the
front surface.
Edge’s thinnest position (on the boundary
between the distance part and near part)
• Move the bevel position on the upper part
forward, observing that the bevel tip point
at the edge’s thinnest point remains on the
edge.
• Set such a tilting amount (TILT) so that the
tip of the bevel barely remains.
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
㧮%48㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧠㧟
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧝㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㨀㧵㧸㨀㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧚
㧜㧜‫ޓ‬
㧲%48㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧡㧜㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
㧮%48㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧠㧟
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧝㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㨀㧵㧸㨀㧦‫ޓ‬㧙㧜㧤‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧲%48㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧡㧜㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
㧮%48㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧠㧟
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧝㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㨀㧵㧸㨀㧦‫ޓ‬㧙㧜㧣‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧲%48㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧡㧜㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
‫ޓ‬㧚
4 - 36
4.6.2 Flat (rimless) edging
The LE-9000LX Express performs normal flat edging only but the LE-9000SX Express also performs
grooving for nylor frames after flat edging.
The EX lens flat edging mode is also available for EX lenses in normal flat edging.
For grooving, the auto grooving mode in which groove position and curve are calculated from
measured data of a lens, the guided grooving mode in which data is manually input, and the EX
lens grooving mode for grooving EX lenses are available.
4.6.2.1 Flat (rimless) edging mode
1. Check the processing conditions.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
9
: PNT* or NYL
: (Blank)
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧯㧼㧺㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
2. Set a lens to the adapter in the processing unit.
See Step 2 of “4.6.1.1 Auto processing mode”.
3. Close the soundproof cover.
Processing does not start even if
is pressed unless the soundproof cover is closed.
WARNING
• Be sure to keep the soundproof cover closed during processing.
If the soundproof cover is opened during processing, the instrument does not stop.
Spray including processing waste may cause eye damage.
4. Start processing.
Press
.
Lens shape measurement*10
p
Roughing
p
*9 When PNT (Two-point) is selected, FPD is automatically corrected.
Auto-correction of FPD is the function which changes the FPD value in accordance with the
changed size value.
*10
Lens shape measurement is not performed when the “Measure in flat edge” parameter is set
to “None”. See “5.2 Parameter Settings” (p. 5-2). However, lens shape measurement is
performed regardless of the setting if grooving and chamfering are performed.
4 - 37
Finishing
p
Polishing (Only when
is selected by Type PL4, PLB, or PLB-2R.)
p
Chamfering (Only when
is selected.) (LE-9000SX Express only)
p
Processings are complete. [The Layout screen returns.]
* The processing order may change according to the lens material.
5. Remove the lens.
WARNING
• Open the soundproof cover after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete stop.
• Release the chuck by pressing
after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete
stop.
If the chuck is released before the wheels have stopped completely and a lens is dropped,
it may contact the turning wheels and its scattering may cause injury.
NOTE
• When a lens, which is difficult to process or whose edge is thick, is polished, a part of
the edge may remain unpolished.
In such a case, retouch the lens without changing the size compensation value. See
“4.7.2 Retouching lenses” (p. 4-60).
4 - 38
[Addition of grooving] (LE-9000SX Express only)
When the “To add safety bevel” parameter is set to “Exec”, grooving can be additionally performed
(except for glass lenses) after flat edging with the frame setting at “NYL”.
However, as well as retouching, it cannot be performed such as when removing the suction cup,
switching R/L, or reading other frame data.
1) Select “AUT” or “GUI” with
.
2) Set a lens to the adapter in the processing
unit.
Align the top mark (•) on the suction cup
with that of the adapter and insert the suction
cup firmly.
3) Press
or
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧺㨅㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
.
Ÿ Grooving is performed.
Ÿ After retouching, grooving is performed.
If “GUI” has been selected in Step 1), the screen will change to the Simulation screen and
stop temporarily. Check the groove section and adjust the depth and width as necessary.
Then, press
to start grooving. See “4.6.2.4 Guided processing mode”.
NOTE
• If grooving has been performed in the first processing, retouching of the groove can be
performed by the same procedure. If “GUI” is selected, any items on the Simulation
screen can be changed for additional grooving. If the groove which has been already
made is retouched, however, only the depth and width can be changed to a larger size.
• If the SIZ value is changed with
cannot be performed.
, additional grooving and retouching of the groove
4 - 39
4.6.2.2 EX lens flat (rimless) edging mode
This is a mode to measure the lens shape of the front surface and flat edge an EX lens more accurately.
(In the normal flat edging mode, the lens shape of EX lenses cannot be measured.)
Especially, this mode is effective when polishing is selected to obtain polishing with high accuracy.
NOTE
• Use a lens cup for blocking.
A suction cup cannot hold the convex surface of an EX lens securely. It may move
during blocking.
1. Check the processing conditions.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
: PNT
: EX
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧯㧼㧺㨀㧱㨄‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
2. Set a lens to the adapter in the processing unit.
See Step 2 of “4.6.1.1 Auto processing mode”.
3. Close the soundproof cover.
Processing does not start even if
is pressed unless the soundproof cover is closed.
WARNING
• Be sure to keep the soundproof cover closed during processing.
If the soundproof cover is opened during processing, the instrument does not stop.
Spray including processing waste may cause eye damage.
4 - 40
4. Start processing.
Press
.
Lens shape measurement
p
Roughing
p
Finishing
p
Polishing (Only when
is selected by Type PL4, PLB, or PLB-2R.)
p
Chamfering (Only when
is selected.) (LE-9000SX Express only)
p
Processings are complete. [The Layout screen returns.]
* The processing order may change according to the lens material.
5. Remove the lens.
WARNING
• Open the soundproof cover after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete stop.
• Release the chuck by pressing
after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete
stop.
If the chuck is released before the wheels have stopped completely and a lens is dropped,
it may contact the turning wheels and its scattering may cause injury.
NOTE
• When a lens, which is difficult to process or whose edge is thick, is polished, a part of
the edge may remain unpolished.
In such a case, retouch the lens without changing the size compensation value. See
“4.7.2 Retouching lenses” (p. 4-60).
4 - 41
4.6.2.3 Auto grooving mode (LE-9000SX Express only)
This is a mode to groove a lens at the computer-calculated position and curve after flat edging.
NOTE
• In grooving mode, glass lenses cannot be processed.
1. Check the processing conditions.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
: NYL
: AUT
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧺㨅㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
2. Set a lens to the adapter in the processing unit.
See Step 2 of “4.6.1.1 Auto processing mode”.
3. Close the soundproof cover.
Processing does not start even if
is pressed unless the soundproof cover is closed.
WARNING
• Be sure to keep the soundproof cover closed during processing.
If the soundproof cover is opened during processing, the instrument does not stop.
Spray including processing waste may cause eye damage.
4. Start processing.
Press
.
Lens shape measurement
p
Roughing
p
Finishing
p
Polishing (Only when
is selected by Type PL4, PLB, or PLB-2R.)
p
Grooving
p
Chamfering (Only when
is selected.)
p
Processings are complete. [The Layout screen returns.]
* The processing order may change according to the lens material.
4 - 42
NOTE
• If the thinnest lens edge is less than the default, grooving is not performed. At that time, the
message “Lacked lens thickness” will appear after the lens shape measurement, and then the
instrument will stop.
Pressing
goes to the Groove simulation screen. See Step 5 of “4.6.2.4 Guided
grooving mode” (p. 4-44).
Pressing
stops processing. Processing can be performed in the flat edging
mode by setting the mode blank.
5. Remove the lens.
WARNING
• Open the soundproof cover after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete stop.
• Release the chuck by pressing
after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete
stop.
If the chuck is released before the wheels have stopped completely and a lens is dropped,
it may contact the turning wheels and its scattering may cause injury.
NOTE
• When a lens, which is difficult to process or whose edge is thick, is polished, a part of
the edge may remain unpolished.
In such cases, retouch the lens without changing the size compensation value. See
“4.7.2 Retouching lenses” (p. 4-60).
4 - 43
4.6.2.4 Guided grooving mode (LE-9000SX Express only)
This is a mode to make a groove for nylor frames at the position and curve input manually after flat
edging.
NOTE
• In grooving mode, glass lenses cannot be processed.
1. Check the processing conditions.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
: NYL
: GUI
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧺㨅㧸㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
2. Set a lens to the adapter in the processing unit.
See Step 2 of “4.6.1.1 Auto processing mode”.
3. Close the soundproof cover.
Processing does not start even if
is pressed unless the soundproof cover is closed.
WARNING
• Be sure to keep the soundproof cover closed during processing.
If the soundproof cover is opened during processing, the instrument does not stop.
Spray including processing waste may cause eye damage.
4. Start processing.
Lens shape measurement
p
The screen changes to the Groove simulation screen and the instrument stops.
NOTE
• If the thinnest lens edge is less than the default, grooving is not performed. At that
time, the “Lacked lens thickness” message will appear after lens shape measurement, and
then the instrument stops.
Pressing
goes to the Groove simulation screen. See Step 5 on p. 4-44.
Pressing
stops processing. Processing can be performed in the flat edging
mode by setting the mode blank.
4 - 44
5. Simulate the groove section at each point of
the outline on the screen.
: The sectional view position line rotates
counterclockwise.
: The sectional view position line rotates
clockwise.
To stop the line movement, press
or
again.
: The sectional view position line jumps
Sectional view position line
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
㧳%48㧦㧭‫ޓ‬㧡㧜
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧰㧱㧼㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧢
‫ޓ‬㧚
㨃㧵㧰㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧢㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
‫ޓ‬㧚
to the point that the lens edge is thinnest
( ) and thickest (J) alternately.
J
6. Adjust the groove position.
(a) Changing the groove position only at the part where the edge is thick
1) Align the cursor to G CRV.
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
%48㧦㧭‫ޓ‬㧡㧜
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧳%48
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧰㧱㧼㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧢
‫ޓ‬㧚
㨃㧵㧰㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧢㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
‫ޓ‬㧚
2) Change the groove curve value to move the
groove position toward the front or rear
surface of the lens.
The groove curve
turns sharply.
The groove curve
turns slightly.
: The groove curve turns sharply.
: The groove curve turns slightly.
<Convex lens>
As the curve value is changed, the groove
position moves from the edge’s thinnest
point as the base (The ratio 5:5 will be
maintained). The shifted amount of the
groove is the maximum at the lens edge’s
thickest point. Change the groove curve,
watching the groove sectional view at the
lens edge’s thickest point.
The groove curve
turns slightly.
The groove curve
turns sharply.
<Concave lens>
The curve value with the “A” mark on the head shows that it is a computer-calculated value.
This value produces the same groove curve that is processed in the auto grooving mode.
4 - 45
: The curve of the front base curve (FRNT), rear base curve (REAR), or ratio will be selected.
o Specified curve valueoFront base curve o
(curve profiling
the front surface
of a lens)
Rear base curve o Ratio
(curve profiling
the rear surface
of a lens)
NOTE
• The curve value can only be selected within a range where the groove is on the lens edge.
Therefore, the groove will never be off the edge, and a single-sided groove will never be
produced even if the groove curve value is changed.
(b) Changing the position of the whole groove parallel to itself
1) Press
to simulate the groove at the point
where the edge is thinnest ( ).
2) Align the cursor to PNT.
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
%48㧦㧭‫ޓ‬㧡㧜
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧳%48
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧡‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧰㧱㧼㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧢
‫ޓ‬㧚
㨃㧵㧰㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧢㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
‫ޓ‬㧚
3) Change the groove dip point value to move the
groove position toward the front or rear surface
of the lens.
: The groove moves toward the front
surface.
: The groove moves toward the rear
o
m
surface.
m next to the value shows that the groove was
The groove
The groove
moved toward the front surface. o next to
moves toward
moves toward
the rear surface.
the value shows that the groove was moved
the front surface.
toward the rear surface.
e.g.
G CRV: A 5.0
PNT : o 0.6
This shows that the groove was moved 0.6 mm toward the rear surface parallel to itself while the
groove curve value was 5.0.
NOTE
• In order to avoid the groove being off the lens edge, be sure to watch the simulation at the
thinnest position while changing the value.
As distinct from changing the groove curve value, the groove may go off the lens edge.
4 - 46
7. Check the groove section.
1) Press
to turn off the cursor.
2) Simulate the whole groove to see if the desired
groove is obtained. See Step 5 on page 4-44.
8. Repeat Steps 5 - 7 until the desired groove is
obtained.
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
%48㧦㧭‫ޓ‬㧡㧜
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧳%48
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧡‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧰㧱㧼㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧢
‫ޓ‬㧚
㨃㧵㧰㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧢㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
‫ޓ‬㧚
9. Start processing.
Press
.
Roughing
p
Finishing
p
Polishing (Only when
is selected by Type PL4, PLB, or PLB-2R.)
p
Grooving
p
Chamfering (Only when
is selected.)
p
Processings are complete. [The Layout screen returns.]
* The processing order may change according to the lens material.
10. Remove the lens.
WARNING
• Open the soundproof cover after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete stop.
• Release the chuck by pressing
after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete
stop.
If the chuck is released before the wheels have stopped completely and a lens is dropped,
it may contact the turning wheels and its scattering may cause injury.
NOTE
• When a lens, which is difficult to process or whose edge is thick, is polished, a part of
the edge may remain unpolished.
In such cases, retouch the lens without changing size compensation value. See “4.7.2
Retouching lenses” (p. 4-60).
4 - 47
4.6.2.5 EX lens grooving mode (LE-9000SX Express only)
This is a mode to flat edge the EX lens and make a groove for nylor frames. In this mode, the groove
is set to the curve of the rear lens surface.
NOTE
• In EX grooving mode, glass lenses cannot be processed.
• Use the lens cup for blocking.
The suction cup cannot hold the convex surface of an EX lens securely. The cup
may move during blocking.
1. Check the processing conditions.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
: NYL
: EX
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧺㨅㧸㧱㨄‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
2. Set a lens to the adapter in the processing unit.
See Step 2 of “4.6.1.1 Auto processing mode”.
3. Close the soundproof cover.
Processing does not start even if
is pressed unless the soundproof cover is closed.
WARNING
• Be sure to keep the soundproof cover closed during processing.
If the soundproof cover is opened during processing, the instrument does not stop.
Spray including processing waste may cause eye damage.
4. Start processing.
Press
Lens shape measurement
p
The screen changes to the Groove simulation screen and the instrument stops.
4 - 48
NOTE
• If the thinnest lens edge is less than the default, grooving is not performed. At that time, the
“Lacked lens thickness” messag will appear after the lens shape measurement, and then the
instrument stops.
Pressing
goes to the Groove simulation screen. See Step 5 on page 4-48.
Pressing
stops processing. Processing can be performed in the flat edging
mode by setting the mode blank.
5. Simulate the groove section at each point of the outline on the screen.
:
The sectional view position line rotates counterclockwise.
:
The sectional view position line rotates clockwise.
or
again.
To stop the line movement, press
: The sectional view position line jumps to the point that the lens edge is thinnest ( ) and
thickest (J) alternately.
J
[For changing the groove position]
See Step 6 - of “4.6.2.4 Guided grooving mode” (p. 4-44) to change the groove position.
NOTE
• As for the curve value, do not change it but leave it as “REAR”.
The specified curve, front base curve, or ratio is inappropriate for proper grooving.
4 - 49
6. Start processing.
Press
.
Roughing
p
Finishing
p
Polishing (Only when
is selected by Type PL4, PLB, or PLB-2R.)
p
Grooving
p
Chamfering (Only when
is selected.)
p
Processings are complete. [The Layout screen returns.]
* The processing order may change according to the lens material.
7. Remove the lens.
WARNING
• Open the soundproof cover after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete stop.
• Release the chuck by pressing
after making sure that the wheels have come to a complete
stop.
If the chuck is released before the wheels have stopped completely and a lens is dropped,
it may contact the turning wheels and its scattering may cause injury.
NOTE
• When a lens, which is difficult to process or whose edge is thick, is polished, a part of
the edge may remain unpolished.
In such cases, retouch the lens without changing the size compensation value. See
“4.7.2 Retouching lenses” (p. 4-60).
4 - 50
4.6.3 Other processings
4.6.3.1 Processing for frame changing
1. Trace new frames.
2. Call up traced data.
Press
.
The traced outline of the frames will appear
on the screen.
3. Establish the frame changing mode.
Press
.
FC will appear at the bottom right of the screen.
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓ‬㧲㧯㧾
NOTE
• Set the layout mode to ACT (Active).
If the passive mode or bifocal mode is selected, the simple frame changing mode is
established and outlines are not overlaid.
• While the frame changing mode is active,
does not function.
• In frame changing mode, only when “GLS” is set for the lens material, the soft processing
mode can be selected. See “4.6.3.5 Soft processing” (p. 4-58).
4. Block a lens with a lens cup.
1) With lenses fit in frames, mark the optical
centers and horizontal direction with a
lensmeter.
2) Remove the lenses from the frames.
3) Block the convex surface of the lens with a
lens cup, using a centering device.
4 - 51
5. Set the lens to the pattern setting unit while
pressing the white button.
Align the top mark on the cup with the direction
of the white button.
White button
6. Trace the lens in the same manner as Steps 2
- 4 of “4.3.2 Tracing pattern”.
After tracing is completed, the traced lens
outline (thick line) will appear over the frame
outline (thin line) on the screen.
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓ‬㧲㧯㧾
7. Set processing conditions and enter layout
data (PD, ).
See “4.4.1 Selecting processing conditions and
inputting layout data” (p. 4-11).
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧣㧜
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧡㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧝㧡‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧻㧸㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓ‬㧲㧯㧾
8. Make sure that the lens size is large enough
for the frame.*11
Check if the whole frame outline (thin line) is
within the lens outline (thick line).
Thick line
Thin line
*11 If the lens size is not large enough for the frame, it is possible to move the location of the frame
outline into the lens outline by changing the PD or value. The finished lens, however, will
not follow prescription.
4 - 52
9. Remove the lens with the lens cup from the pattern setting unit.
10. Process the lens.
Processing will not start if it is judged during lens shape measurement*12 that the lens size is
not large enough for processing.
11. Press
to switch the lens (R or L), and process the other lens in the same manner as
Steps 4 - 10.
12. After both lenses are processed, press
to exit from the FC mode.
[Simple frame changing mode]
When the lens size is large enough for new frames, there is no need for lens tracing. Skip Steps
5, 6, 8 and 9 to save the trouble of lens tracing. The ICE-9000 blocks as lens whose frame is to
in the FC mode establishes the
be changed with a lens cup at the rim center. Pressing
simple frame changing mode automatically. This is because the ICE-9000 has already checked
that the lens size is sufficient and outlines do not need to be overlaid by the LE-9000 Express.
*12 In the frame changing mode or simple frame changing mode, a lens can be measured even if
the lens has no extra margin. This is because the feelers measure the lens shape at 1.5 mm
inside of the traced outline.
4 - 53
4.6.3.2 Processing half-eye lenses
When the distance from the blocking point to
the position of the edge-to-be is short and the
lens adapter or lens clamp may contact the
wheels, the mark of the optical center will
change from
to
.
If
is indicated, replace the lens adapter, lens
clamp and lens cup with the ones for half-eye
lenses by the following procedure.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧢
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧱㧯㧹㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧱㧼‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧯㧻㨀㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㧱㨀㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧰
NOTE
• To process a half-eye lens, the following accessories are required.
Required accessories:
a half-eye adapter, a half-eye lens clamp, a half-eye lens cup,
double-coated adhesive tape for half-eye lenses, and a hex driver
• When the traced frame has enough vertical diameter, the standard adapter can be used
by blocking the lens at the rim center in the passive mode.
1. Replace the adapter with that for half-eye lenses.
Set screw
1) Remove the standard adapter.
Loosen the set screw on the standard adapter
with the provided hex driver to remove the
adapter.
2) Set the half-eye lens adapter.
Align the kerf on the adapter with the pin
on the shaft, making sure that the set screw
is facing toward you to fit the adapter. Then
tighten the set screw to fix it.
Pin
Standard adapter
Kerf Set screw
2. Replace the lens clamp with that for half-eye
lenses.
1) Loosen the set screw on the standard clamp
to remove it.
Remove the lens clamp after loosening the
set screw with the hex driver.
2) Fit the half-eye lens clamp securely to the
shaft, and fix it with the set screw.
Fit the lens clamp, aligning its kerf with the
pin on the shaft securely.
Half-eye lens adapter
Standard clamp
Half-eye lens clamp
4 - 54
3. Block the lens with the half-eye lens cup.
1) Stick the provided double-coated adhesive
tape for half-eye lenses to the half-eye lens
cup.
(Double-coated adhesive tape for half-eye
lens is supplied only for the NIDEK type.)
If you use the conventional double-coated
adhesive tape, cut off the excess part along
the edge of the cup.
If the lens is processed without cutting the
excess part, the feeler will be put on the tape
in the lens shape measurement and correct
processing may not be performed.
Double-coated adhesive tape
for half-eye lenses
Cut off
2) Block the lens with the half-eye lens cup.
Conventional double-coated adhesive tape
Cut off
NOTE
• Use the half-eye lens cup that is suitable for the front curve of a lens (only for the NIDEKtype cup).
Color of lens cup
Suitable lens
Front
curve
5 or less
An axis shift may occur if a half-eye
Blue
(Suitable for flat lenses such as an
lens cup that is not suitable for the front
aspheric negative lens)
curve is used.
White
Front curve 5 to 9
Pink
Front curve 9 or more
(Suitable for a lens that has a sharp
front curve)
4. Set the lens to the adapter.
See Step 2 of “4.6.1.1 Auto processing mode”.
NOTE
• Align the top mark on the lens cup with the top mark on the adapter to fit the cup into
the adapter.
If not, the adapter cannot hold the lens cup securely.
5. Close the soundproof cover and press
.
The “Use chuck for half-eye lens” message will appear.
Make sure that the lens adapter, lens clamp and lens cup are the ones for half-eye lenses. If not,
replace them after returning to the Layout screen by pressing
.
NOTE
• Displaying the “Use chuch for half-eye lens” message can be disabled.
When the lens adapter and lens clamp for half-eye lenses are used all the time,
operation will be smooth without stopping the instrument. See “5.2 Parameter
Settings” (p. 5-2).
4 - 55
WARNING
• Be sure to keep the soundproof cover closed during processing.
If the soundproof cover is opened during processing, the instrument does not stop.
Spray including processing waste may cause eye damage.
6. Start processing.
Press
.
NOTE
• After processing a half-eye lens, be sure to replace the adapter and the lens clamp with
the standard ones.
4 - 56
4.6.3.3 Polishing (Types PL4, PLB, and PLB-2R)
This is a mode to polish the lens edge to save the time required to buff the lens edge after finishing.
Set “POL” by pressing
processing with
before starting
.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧺㨅㧸㧭㨁㨀㧼㧻㧸‫ޓޓ‬㧾
NOTE
• Glass lenses cannot be polished.
• For Type PL4, polishing cannot be performed during beveling.
4 - 57
4.6.3.4 Chamfering (LE-9000SX Express only)
Before processings are completed, chamfering can be performed.
Select the SFB mode by pressing
starting processing with
before
.
The LED beside
lights up, and
shown on the screen.
or
is
ŸBoth lens edges are chamfered.
ŸRear lens edge is chamfered.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
For setting or and safety bevel amount, see “8.13.1 Setting the SFB mode and chamfering
amount” (p. 8-31).
[Addition of chamfering]
When the “To add safety bevel” parameter is set to “Exec”, chamfering can be additionally
performed after lens processing.
However, as well as retouching, this cannot be performed such as when removing the suction
cup, switching R/L and reading other frame data.
1) Set the SFB mode by pressing
The LED beside
lights up.
.
Top mark
Top mark
2) Set a lens to the adapter in the processing
unit.
Align the top mark (•) on the suction cup
with that of the adapter and insert the suction
cup firmly. Then press
to fix the lens.
3) Close the soundproof cover and press
or
.
Ÿ Chamfering is performed.
Ÿ
After retouching, chamfering is performed.
NOTE
• If chamfering has been performed in the first processing, the safety bevel can be
retouched by the same procedure.
• When the SIZ value is subtracted with
the safety bevel cannot be performed.
, additional chamfering and retouching of
4 - 58
4.6.3.5 Soft processing
This is a processing method to perform the roughing
process more precisely. Even though the processing
time is extended a little, the processing sound and
axis shift during processing are reduced.
For processing of lenses whose coating is very
smooth, select this soft processing mode to reduce
the axis shift due to slippage.
When glass lenses are broken during processing,
also select the soft processing mode to prevent
them from breaking.
Displayed only when the soft processing
mode is selected.
㧚‫ ޓ‬㧿㧻㧲㨀‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧺㨅㧸㧭㨁㨀㧼㧻㧸‫ޓ‬㧾
NOTE
• The soft processing mode is effective only when “PLA”, “HPL”, “PC”, or “GLS” is
selected for the lens material.
• When “PLA”, “HPL”, or “PC” is selected for the lens material, the soft processing
mode cannot be selected in the frame changing mode.
• When glass lenses are broken in the half-eye lens processing, use a white lens cup or
the optional pliable cup.
[Setting the soft processing mode at all times]
Set the “Grinding mode” parameter to “Soft” on the Parameter exchange mode screen. See
“5.2 Parameter Settings” (p. 5-2).
When the lens material is set to “PLA”, “HPL”, “PC”, or “GLS”, the soft processing mode is
automatically turned on.
[Setting the normal processing mode and soft processing mode on the Layout screen]
for about 1 second produces a beep and
Regardless of the parameter setting, pressing
turns on or off the soft processing mode.
When the soft processing mode is on, “SOFT” is displayed at the upper part of the Layout
screen.
4 - 59
4.6.3.6 Inputting the frame tilt angle in flat edging
To increase the finished PD accuracy, correction is made using the frame tilt angle measured
during tracing. For nylor or two-point frames, however, the frame tilt angle cannot be measured
because the pattern is traced. The frame tilt angle is entered for a corrective calculation to
increase the finished PD accuracy in flat edging.
This parameter is factory set to 5.0°. For frames that are very tilted, it is recommended to enter
the frame tilt angle by the following procedure and then set the value back to the original after
processing.
1. Roughly measure the frame tilt angle using
a piece of graph paper.
2. Recall the MENU screen.
Press
.
Frame tilt angle
3. Recall the PD adjustment screen.
After moving the cursor o to “PD adjustment”,
press
.
4. After moving the cursor o to “Frame Tilt
Angle (flat)”, enter the frame tilt angle using
or
.
Range: 0.0 to 30.0°, increment: 0.5°
5. Go back to the MENU screen.
Press
.
6. Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
twice.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㨍㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ㧲㨞㨍㨙㨑‫ޓ‬㨀㨕㨘㨠‫ޓ‬㧭㨚㨓㨘㨑㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧝㧤㧚㧜q‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
4 - 60
4.7 Checking the Lens Size
Check the lens size after processing is completed. If the lens is too large, retouch it to correct the
size.
4.7.1 Checking the lens size
Fit the lens in the frame and measure the gap at the rim joint.
NOTE
Gap
• Do not remove the cup yet, otherwise the
lens cannot be retouched.
4.7.2 Retouching lenses
If the finished size of the lens is too large to fit into the rim, retouch the lens.
1. Change the SIZ value with
.
No values other than SIZ can be changed.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧿㧵㨆㧦㧙㧜㧟㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
Reference guide for size correction:
Subtract one-third of the gap size at
the rim joint from the SIZ value.
e.g. For the gap of 1 mm:
1/3 × 1 (mm) = approx. 0.3 (mm)
Subtract 0.3 from the SIZ value.
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
2. Set the lens to the adapter.
Align the top mark (•) on the cup with that of
the adapter to reset the lens. Then, press
to fix the lens.
3. Start retouching.
Close the soundproof cover and press
.
4. After the process, check the lens size again.
If the finished lens is still too large, retouch it again.
Top mark
Top mark
4 - 61
NOTE
• In the retouching process, reducing the lens size by 0.5 mm or more may narrow its vertical
width.
Therefore, in the trial processing, process a lens with its size 3 mm larger. In actual
processing, do not perform retouching but follow the instructions below to start with
roughing.
1) Change the size value.
2) Press
3) Press
twice.
to start processing.
• Retouching cannot be performed such as when removing the suction cup, switching R/
L, or reading other frame data.
[Retouching of the groove] (LE-9000SX Express only)
A groove can be retouched by the same procedure with “[Addition of grooving]” (p. 4-38).
If the SIZ value has been changed, the groove cannot be retouched.
When “GUI” is selected, any changes other than the groove depth and width to a larger size
cannot be made on the Simulation screen.
[Retouching of the safety bevel] (LE-9000SX Express only)
A safety bevel can be retouched by the same procedure with “[Addition of chamfering]” (p. 457).
If the SIZ value has been changed, the safety bevel cannot be retouched.
4 - 62
4.8 Processing the Opposite Lens
1. Change the lens to be processed.
Press
to switch the lens to be processed.
2. Process the other lens in the same manner.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧸
4.9 Removing the Lens Cup
When removing the lens cup (suction cup or lens cup), use the provided cup remover.
Insert the cup remover into the lens cup, and
remove the lens cup while prying the cup with
the remover.
Cup remover
Since lenses such as polycarbonate lenses are
thin, prying the cup may crack the coated
surface of the lens. In such cases, remove the
lens cup while turning the remover.
CAUTION
• When removing the lens cup while prying it off with the cup remover, hold the lens
with a soft cloth.
If you hold a lens with bare hands, the lens edge may injure your hands.
4 - 63
4.10 Treatment after Daily Use
1. Clean the processing unit.
Follow Steps 1 - 4 in “8.1 Wheel Dressing” to water the processing unit and wash out the
processing waste with a brush.
CAUTION
• Be careful not to let water get inside the instrument.
It may cause instrument malfunction.
NOTE
• Clean the processing unit after the final use of the day. Be sure to clean it on the day
that the instrument is used.
If the instrument is left for several days after use, the processing waste becomes settled
and hard to remove.
2. Turn the power off.
3. Perform the after-use daily check. See “4.11.2 Daily check after use” (p. 4-65).
4. Close the cover of the tracing unit.
5. Store accessories in a customary place.
Wipe off the accessories and store them in a customary place to avoid possible loss or breakage.
4 - 64
4.11 Daily Checks
4.11.1 Daily check before use
Check the following before use every day.
It is recommended to provide a check list to make sure everything is checked.
A. Is the wheel in proper condition?
Check that there are no fractures, cracks, or flaws on the wheel.
CAUTION
• If a fracture, crack or flaw is found on the wheel, stop using the instrument and contact
NDIEK or your authorized distributor.
Continued use of the instrument may break the processing wheel and its broken
pieces may injure the personnel.
B. Is there enough water in the tank ?
The tank should be filled up to 70 - 80% with water.
NOTE
• If the water is very dirty, replace the water. See “8.2 Replacing the Water and Filter” (p. 8-5).
With dirty water, the lens edge may not be well polished.
C. Does the stocking filter have enough free space?
If it is filled with processing waste, replace the stocking filter. See “8.2 Replacing the Water
and Filter” (p. 8-5).
D. Does the Layout screen appear when the power is turned on?
1) Turn the power on.
2) Make sure that the Layout screen appears without an error.
E. It is recommended to calibrate the tracing unit.
See “8.14 Tracer Calibration” (p. 8-35).
F. Confirm that wash water (for the inside wall of the processing chamber) and cooling water
(for the wheels) flow properly.
1) Set dressing mode.
2) Press
to confirm that wash water and cooling water are flowing.
CAUTION
• Take care not to get spray into your eyes.
Spray including processing waste may damage eye damage.
If wash water or cooling water do not flow, confirm that the PUMP1 and PUMP2 hoses and the
power cords are properly connected to the main unit.
4 - 65
4.11.2 Daily check after use
Check the following after the final use every day.
It is recommended to provide a check list to make sure everything is checked.
A. Is the power turned off?
B. Is the processing unit well cleaned?
C. Are there any stains on or damage to the main body?
D. Do any accessories have damage?
For accessories, see “§10 ACCESSORIES”.
4.12 Periodical Check
It is recommended to perform inspection every two years in order to use the instrument for a
long time under normal conditions. In the periodical inspection, a performance check of the
whole system and replacement of maintenance parts are done.
If inspection is required, contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
Periodical maintenance item
Wheels*
Spindle unit
Chamber
Carriage
Interior of the instrument
Feedwater/Drain pipes
(including feedwater pipes
in the instrument)
Maintenance contents
Check that there is no deterioration in the processing
performance.
Replace the wheel if its processing surface is frayed,
which will be a problem in practical use.
Put more grease on the waterproof seal.
Replace the waterproof seal if has deteriorated.
Check that there are no cracks, fractures, deterioration,
or problems on the chamber.
Replace the chamber if there is a problem.
Put more grease on the lens clamp axis, Y axis, and X
axis, or lens rotating axis of the carriage.
Check that there is no waste inside of the instrument.
Clean the interior if waste is found.
Check that there are no cracks, deterioration, or
clogging in the feedwater hoses and drain pipe visually
and by touch.
Replace a hose or pipe if there is a problem.
* Replace the wheel every two years or after the processing of five thousand lenses. Contact
NIDEK or your authorized distributor. However, the lens number is referred only as a guide, so
replacement at an earlier period may be needed under such conditions that hard lenses have
been processed successively or numerous high-power minus lenses have been processed.
Be careful not to dress or process glass lenses with the wheel for plastic lenses. If the wheel has
been damaged because of such carelessness, it will extremely shorten the lifetime of the wheel.
§5
OTHER FUNCTIONS
5.1 Process Counter
This function displays the count for lenses that have been processed since production for each
lens material. In addition, the counts for polished, grooved, and chamfered lenses are also displayed.
1. Recall the MENU screen.
Press
.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖
‫ޓ‬
㧹
㧱
㧺
㨁
‫ޓ‬
㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧸㨑㨚㨓㨠㨔‫ޓ‬㧾㧦㧝㧢㧞㧚㧤㧟‫ޓ‬㧸㧦㧝㧢㧞㧚㧤㧟㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖㧱㨤㨑㨏㨡㨠㨑‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
2. Select “Process counter”.
Align the pointer (o) to “Process counter” and
press
.
The process count for each material will be
displayed.*1
For the LE-9000SX Express, to check the
chamfered lens count and total process count,
move the pointer (o) downward with
.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧳㨘㨍㨟㨟‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧠㧟㧠‫ޓ‬㧼㧯㧿‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㨘㨍㨟㨠㨕㨏‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧣㧝㧟‫ޓ‬㧼㧯㧿‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㨛㨘㨥㨏㨍‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧞㧡㧜‫ޓ‬㧼㧯㧿‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㨛㨘㨕㨟㨔‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧠㧡㧞‫ޓ‬㧼㧯㧿‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧠㧜㧜‫ޓ‬㧼㧯㧿‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧳㨘㨍㨟㨟‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧠㧟㧠‫ޓ‬㧼㧯㧿‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㨘㨍㨟㨠㨕㨏‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧣㧝㧟‫ޓ‬㧼㧯㧿‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㨛㨘㨥㨏㨍‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧞㧡㧜‫ޓ‬㧼㧯㧿‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㨛㨘㨕㨟㨔‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧠㧡㧞‫ޓ‬㧼㧯㧿‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧠㧜㧜‫ޓ‬㧼㧯㧿‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㧲㨞㨛㨚㨠‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧡㧜㧜‫ޓ‬㧼㧯㧿‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬
3. Go back to the MENU screen.
Press
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㧾㨑㨍㨞‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜㧜㧝㧜㧝㧟‫ޓ‬㧼㧯㧿‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㨀㨛㨠㨍㨘‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧝㧟㧥㧣‫ޓ‬㧼㧯㧿‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬
.
4. Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
twice.
*1 The process counter of high index plastic, acrylic resin or trivex lenses is included in Plastic. If
it is optionally set to process high index plastic lenses with the glass roughing wheel, the
process counter of high index plastic lenses is included in Glass
5-2
5.2 Parameter Settings
This function sets each parameter according to the operator’s use.
1. Recall the MENU screen.
Press
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖
‫ޓ‬
㧹
㧱
㧺
㨁
‫ޓ‬
㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧸㨑㨚㨓㨠㨔‫ޓ‬㧾㧦㧝㧢㧞㧚㧤㧟‫ޓ‬㧸㧦㧝㧢㧞㧚㧤㧟㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖㧱㨤㨑㨏㨡㨠㨑‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
.
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
2. Recall the Parameter exchange mode screen.
Press
again.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㨍㨞㨍㨙㨑㨠㨑㨞‫ޓ‬㨑㨤㨏㨔㨍㨚㨓㨑‫ޓ‬㨙㨛㨐㨑‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㨂㨑㨞㧚‫ޓ‬㧹㧭㧿㨀㧱㧾‫ޓ‬㨂㧝㧚㧜㧤㧚㧝㧝‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㨀㧾㧭㧯㧱㧾‫ޓ‬㨂㧞㧚㧜㧝‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㨀㨅㧼㧱‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㧸㧠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
ψ‫ޓ‬㧸㧭㧺㧳㨁㧭㧳㧱‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧱㧺㧳㧸㧵㧿㧴㧔㧿㧕‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧝㧕‫ޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨜㨞㨑㨟㨑㨠㧔㧼㧸㧭㧘㧹㨀㧸㧕㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧕‫ޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨜㨞㨑㨟㨑㨠㧔㧼㧸㧭㧘㧯㧱㧸㧕㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧟㧕‫ޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨜㨞㨑㨟㨑㨠㧔㧳㧸㧿㧘㧹㨀㧸㧕㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
3. Select the item whose parameter needs to be
changed.
Align the pointer (o) to the desired item with
or
.
‫ޓ‬㧝㧡㧕‫ޓ‬㧮㧲‫ޓ‬㧯㨔㨡㨏㨗㧸㨍㨥㨛㨡㨠‫ޓ‬㧿㨕㨐㨑‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧙㧡㨙㨙
‫ޓ‬㧝㧢㧕‫ޓ‬㧮㧲‫ޓ‬㧯㨔㨡㨏㨗㧸㨍㨥㨛㨡㨠‫ޓ‬㧴㨑㨕㨓㨔㨠㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧡㨙㨙
‫ޓ‬㧝㧣㧕‫ޓ‬㨀㧵㧸㨀‫ޓ‬㧲㨡㨚㨏㨠㨕㨛㨚‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧺㨛㨚㨑
‫ޓ‬㧝㧤㧕‫ޓ‬㧾㨑㨢㨑㨞㨟㨑‫ޓ‬㧳㧸㧿‫ޓ‬㧳㨞㨕㨚㨐‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧺㨛㨚㨑
ψ㧝㧥㧕‫ޓ‬㧳㨞㨕㨚㨐㨕㨚㨓‫ޓ‬㨙㨛㨐㨑‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧿㨀㧰‫ޓ‬
The setting items and their contents are displayed
on the next page.
4. Change the setting.
Change the setting with
or
‫ޓ‬㧞㧜㧕‫ޓ‬㧹㨑㨍㨟㧚㨍㨒㨠㨑㨞‫ޓ‬㨞㨛㨡㨓㨔㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧺㨛㨚㨑
‫ޓ‬㧞㧝㧕‫ޓ‬㧹㨍㨕㨚㨠㨑㨚㨍㨚㨏㨑‫ޓ‬㨙㨑㨟㨟㨍㨓㨑‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧮㨛㨠㨔
‫ޓ‬㧞㧞㧕‫ޓ‬㨀㨛‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨐‫ޓ‬㨟㨍㨒㨑㨠㨥‫ޓ‬㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧺㨛㨚㨑
.
5. Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
.
[Parameter items and the setting contents]
1) Size preset (PLA, MTL)
: ±F.FF
2) Size preset (PLA, CEL or ZYL)
: ±F.FF
3) Size preset (GLS, MTL)
: ±F.FF (not function for Type PLB)
4) Size preset (GLS, CEL or ZYL)
: ±F.FF (not function for Type PLB)
Factory setting: +0.00 [mm]
Initial settings of the size corrective value for each combination of lens material and frame
material.
(Available setting value: –9.95 - +9.95)
For the value of the lens material of the high index plastic, polycarbonate, acrylic resin, and
trivex lenses, it complies with the one for plastic lenses.
5-3
5) Initial value of FPD
Factory setting: +70.0 [mm]
Sets the initial FPD value.
: ±FF.F
6) Initial value of PD
: ±FF.F
Factory setting: +62.0 [mm]
Sets the initial PD value.
Press
or
to input any PD value. The set value appears first on the Layout screen.
7) Layout preset
: ±FF.F
Factory setting: +2.0 [mm]
Presets the height of the optical center. Set the value as the height of the optical center from the
rim center. When each item of data of the lens layout is input, this value is automatically set at
(could be PD or BT ). This setting is not effective for the eye point layout.
8) Measure in flat edge
: None, Exec
Factory setting: Exec
Selects whether to measure the lens shape during flat (rimless) edging. When “Exec” is selected, the lens shape will be measured (front surface only) before roughing to check if the lens
size is large enough.
Lenses can be processed without measuring the lens shape by selecting “None”. Regardless of the setting, the lens shape will be measured when the “To add safety bevel”
parameter is set to “Exec”, or chamfering and/or grooving is performed.
9) Grind by mirror image
: R, L
Factory setting: R
When both rims are traced, the mirror image of the right or left rim will be used as the lens
shape data for the opposite lens. This parameter decides which is the base side (right or left).
In spite of the shape being mirrored, the size (circumference) is not mirrored, but comply with
the outline for the respective lens.
10) Ext. interface: None, STD., RS232, LAN, ExLAN, MGNET, BK/LE, NAVIS, DVI, VCA-A, VCA-B
Factory setting: NAVIS
Selects whether or not to communicate with an external instrument and sets the communication
format. Only when “None” is selected, the memory function becomes available.
STD.:
NIDEK standard format. This is used to connect a NIDEK instrument with the edger.
The edger is able to interface with the NIDEK LT-200, LT-700, LT-800, or LT-900.
RS232: RS-232C standard format
LAN:
LAN format
ExLAN: Extended specifications for the LAN format
MGNET: Format for the MEGANET terminal
BK/LE: Communication format for the one-to-one connection with the NIDEK INTELLIGENT BLOCKER ICE-2000/ICE-9000/ICE mini
NAVIS: Format for the NAVIS-EC terminal
DVI:
DVI format
VCA-A: VCA format
VCA-B: VCA format. In VCA (OMA) communication, the received circumference is not
used but the 3-D circumference is recalculated from the frame curve for processing.
5-4
11) Layout memory
: None, Exec
Factory setting: Exec
Selects whether or not to recall layout data as well as the lens shape when data with the
memory function is recalled.
On the following screen, data in the
area shows that it can be recalled to the screen at
each setting.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓ‬㧝㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧺㨅㧸㧭㨁㨀㧼㧻㧸‫ޓޓ‬㧾
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓ‬㧝㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧺㨅㧸㧭㨁㨀㧼㧻㧸‫ޓޓ‬㧾
<When setting at “None”>
<When setting at “Exec”>
12) Bar Code memory
: None, Exec
Factory setting: None
Selects whether or not to use the optional barcode scanner to recall the data from the internal
memory. By connecting the barcode scanner, it becomes possible to store 500 pieces of frame
data.
13) Half eye check
: None, Exec
Factory setting: Exec
Selects whether or not to display the message suggesting cup replacement and to stop the
instrument, during processing of a lens with a short vertical width.
Set this parameter to “Exec” except when the half-eye lens chucking is successively performed.
14) Data Transfer
: NON, VALUE, MATER, POLIS, BF, ALL
Factory setting: NON
Selects the kinds of data that the edger does not accept when receiving the data from an
external device. The selected data in the parameter will be transmitted, but not accepted by
the edger. On the edger side, the previous data remains active even after data transmission.
Only when the communication specifications are special and the “Ext. interface” parameter is
set to “DVI”, this setting is available.
NON: No received data is disabled; All the data will be recognized and displayed on the screen.
VALUE: All the data of the lens layout is disabled.
MATER: The data of lens material is disabled.
POLIS: Only the data of “POL (polishing)” is disabled.
BF:
Only the data of “BIF (bifocal) mode” is disabled.
ALL: All the data of the lens layout and processing conditions are disabled.
15) BF ChuckLayout Side
: ±FF mm
(If a minus value is input, the lens will be processed with its blocked point at the specified value outside from the top line center of the segment.)
Factory setting: –5 [mm]
5-5
16) BF ChuckLayout Height
: ±FF mm
Factory setting: +5 [mm]
Sets the lens layout for blocking a bifocal lens. Specify the shifted values from the top line
center of the segment in blocking the bifocal lens. When using the NIDEK Centering device,
Model CE-1, leave the setting at the factory setting (5 mm outside, 5 mm up) and never change
it.
17) TILT Function
: None, Exec
Factory setting: None
Selects whether or not to use the tilting function in the guided processing mode. If a lens has an
extreme difference in width between the edge’s thickest point and thinnest point, the appearance of the mounted lenses will improve by tilting the bevel.
18) Reverse GLS Grind
: None, Exec
Factory setting: None
Selects whether or not to use the roughing function which changes the lens rotation direction to
reduce the processing time of a glass lens. To put a premium on the processing time reduction, set
this parameter to “Exec”. Setting this parameter to “Exec” roughly processes a lens by automatically changing the position to be contacted with the wheel from side to side so that the roughing
wheel will not be worn on one side.
19) Grinding mode
: STD, Soft
Factory setting: STD
Selects whether or not to turn on the soft processing mode as default. See “4.6.3.5 Soft
processing” (p. 4-58). If this parameter is set to “Soft”, the soft processing mode is automatically turned on when “PLA”, “HPL”, “PC”, or “GLS” is selected for the lens material. In this
mode, the processing sound and the axis shift of a lens whose coating is smooth are reduced.
For glass lenses, this mode is effective to prevent lenses from breaking during processing.
20) Meas. after roughing
: None, All, PLA
Factory setting: None
Sets the function that allows remeasurement of lens shape after roughing.
None: After roughing, the lens shape is not remeasured.
All:
Except when the lens material is set to “GLS” (glass), the lens shape is remeasured
after roughing.
PLA: When the lens material is set to “PLA” (plastic) or “HPL” (high-index plastic), the lens
shape is remeasured after roughing.
Remeasuring the lens shape after roughing prolongs the processing time; however, the problem
that a bevel or groove is displaced from the desired position due to distortion produced on a
lens during roughing can be improved.
Regardless of this setting, the lens shape will not be measured when both the “Measure in
flat edge” parameter and the “To add safety bevel” parameter are set to “None”, and
neither chamfering nor grooving is performed in flat edging.
5-6
21) Maintenance message: Tank, Wheel, Both, None
Factory setting: Both
Sets the function that displays a maintenance message that prompts the user to replace the
processing water or dress the wheel.
Tank: Immediately after processing of 70 lenses, “Please Clean Tank & Pump and Replace
filter” is displayed.
Wheel: Immediately after processing of 2000 lenses, “Wheel Dressing Reminder/ Dress bevel
and polish wheels/ See Operator’s Manual” is displayed.
Both: Both settings of the above Tank and Wheel are enabled.
None: Both settings of the above Tank and Wheel are disabled.
22) To add safety bevel
: None, Exec (LE-9000SX Express only)
Factory setting: None
Selects whether or not to perform chamfering additionally in the state of retouching after the
process. When “Exec” is selected, the lens shape will be measured before processing so that
the chamfering and/or grooving can be performed.
5.3 Storing the Initial Screen
This function stores the following items on the Layout screen as the initial screen which appears just
after power-up. If the factory-set items on the initial screen do not satisfy the operator’s needs, it is
possible to change the items to be displayed and restore them. This function eliminates the inconvenience
of changing the unnecessary items every time the initial Layout screen appears.
<Items to be stored>
Items with
are changeable and can be stored.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓ‬㧝㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧹㨀㧸㧭㨁㨀㧼㧻㧸‫ޓޓ‬㧾
• FPD, DBL, or Eye point layout (whether or not to select the eye point layout]
• PD or 1/2PD [inputting form of pupillary distance]
• , PD , or BT (inputting form of height of the optical center)
• ACT, BF, or PAS [Layout mode]
• PLA, HPL, PC, GLS, ACR, or TRX [Lens material] (Except for glass lenses of Type PLB)
• MTL, CEL (ZYL), PNT, or NYL [Frame material]
• AUT, GUI, EX, or Blank [Processing mode]
• POL or (Blank) [Whether or not to polish](Types PL4, PLB, and PLB-2R only)
• R or L [The lens which appears first after
• ON/OFF of
is pressed.]
[Whether or not to perform chamfering] (LE-9000SX Express only)
Each value on the screen cannot be stored. For setting the respective preset values for FPD,
PD, and height of the optical center, see “5.2 Parameter Settings” (p. 5-2).
5-7
<Storing method>
1. Change the settings.
Set the settings of the above items on the Layout screen as desired.
2. Store the new settings.
Hold
down for 5 seconds.
A beep will be produced to indicate items on the screen have been stored.
5.4 Storing and Calling Up Traced Data
The edger is provided with a memory function, which stores traced data and lens layout data in its
memory and calls up them whenever necessary. By storing a respective lens outline as a standard data
and calling up it with the function, an operator does not have to trace the same lens for each processing
and can save required time for lens processing. In addition, even though a frame is not handy, it is
possible to process the lens as soon as it is ready to be processed. The memory holds up to 100 sets
of the traced and layout data at most. The use of the optional barcode scanner extends the storable
number of data up to 500 sets of data.
CAUTION
• Before processing a lens using data called up from the memory, check the traced outline on
the screen.
When called data is abnormal, the error code (Error 0906) will appear. Restore the data
without processing.
NOTE
• Concurrent use of the communication function and memory function is impossible. Only
when the “Ext. interface” parameter is set to “None”, the memory function becomes available.
• The stored data is battery-protected even if the power has been turned off.
Since this battery is rechargeable, the battery becomes empty and the stored data may be
lost if the instrument is not used for a long time (about one month) or soon after the instrument
is purchased. In this case, turn on the power of the main body and charge the battery. For
full-charging, it is necessary to keep the power on for 15 hours.
If power is supplied to the instrument for one hour or more every day after full-charging,
the battery becomes almost fully charged. If the instrument is used for a short time, keep
the power of the instrument on for several hours once a month.
5-8
5.4.1 When the edger is not connected to the barcode scanner
The internal memory built into the standard type of instrument can store and manage the traced outline
and lens layout data of 100 sets of frames.
<Storing method>
1. Perform tracing.
2. Press
to call up traced outline on the screen.
3. Input layout data if necessary.
4. Align the cursor (
) to “MEM” with
5. Select the memory address*2 from the 001 to
100 range with
or
.
The indication of an address whose data has already
been stored is highlighted.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧡
. 㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧥㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧞㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓ‬㧝㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧺㨅㧸㧭㨁㨀㧼㧻㧸‫ޓޓ‬㧾
6. Press
to store data such as traced
outline, lens layout, lens material, frame type,
processing mode, and polishing (on/off).
Memory address
<Calling up method>
To call up the traced outline only, set the “11) Layout memory” parameter to “None” in advance (see p.
5-4).
1. Align the cursor to “MEM” with
.
2. Select the memory address with
or
.
The indication of an address whose data has already been stored is highlighted.
3. Hold
down until the instrument produces two beeps.
The traced outline will appear on the Layout screen.
*2 Memory address shows the data address at which the traced data and layout data are stored. If
you store new data under the address at which data has been already stored, the former data
will be erased.
5-9
5.4.2 When the edger is connected to the barcode scanner
By connection of the edger to the optional barcode scanner, the barcode memory function, which
stores traced outline and lens layout data for a maximum of 500 sets of frames, becomes available.
The read barcode number is stored as the registered number of data. The barcode numbers allow
easy management of frames.
CAUTION
• The barcode memory function cannot be used concurrently with the memory function
with memory addresses of the standard specifications.
• When the instrument is changed from the standard specifications to the barcode
specifications, all the data stored with memory addresses will be erased.
NOTE
• Make sure that the barcode scanner is connected to the connector for the barcode on the
rear panel of the instrument (see p. 3-1).
<Storing method>
1. Perform tracing.
2. Press
to recall traced outline to the screen.
3. Input each item of data of the lens layout as necessary.
4. Read the corresponding barcode of the frame
to be stored.
The screen will change to the Barcode screen,
and the read barcode will be displayed.*3
‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧯㧻㧰㧱‫ޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧝㧞㧟㧠㧡㧢㧣㧤㧥㧜㧝㧞㧟㧠㧡‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧰㧭㨀㧭‫ޓ‬㨃㧾㧵㨀㧱‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧿㨀㧭㧾㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧰㧭㨀㧭‫ޓ‬㧾㧱㧭㧰‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧰㧭㨀㧭‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
5. Press
to store the traced outline, lens
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧯㧭㧺㧯㧱㧸‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
layout, lens material, frame type, and the
processing mode.
After all data have been stored, the Layout screen will return.
NOTE
• To cancel the data storage to the memory after reading the barcode, press
.
*3 When data is additionally stored with a barcode number whose data has already been stored,
the former data will be erased.
5 - 10
<Calling up method>
To store only the traced outline and not store the lens layout data, set the “Layout memory” parameter
to “None” in advance (see p. 5-4).
1. Read the barcode of the frame whose data is
to be recalled.
The screen will change to the Barcode screen, and
the read barcode will be displayed.
‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧯㧻㧰㧱‫ޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧝㧞㧟㧠㧡㧢㧣㧤㧥㧜㧝㧞㧟㧠㧡‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧰㧭㨀㧭‫ޓ‬㨃㧾㧵㨀㧱‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧿㨀㧭㧾㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧰㧭㨀㧭‫ޓ‬㧾㧱㧭㧰‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧰㧭㨀㧭‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧯㧭㧺㧯㧱㧸‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
2. Press
to recall the data.
After recalling the data, the corresponding traced
outline to the barcode will appear on the screen.
NOTE
• To cancel the data recall from the memory after reading the barcode, press
.
§6
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
In the event that the instrument does not work correctly, correct the problem according to the following
table before contacting your authorized distributor.
Symptom
Action
The screen is not displayed though
Replace fuses. See "8.4 Replacing Fuses" (p. 8-12).
the power is turned on.
The stylus cannot be set in the
groove of frames.
Perform semiauto tracing. See "4.3.1.3 Semiauto
tracing" (p. 4-5).
The stylus comes off the groove of
frames during tracing and tracing
stops. The LED beside
keeps blinking.
Press
to return the stylus to its original position,
and trace the frames again. If the stylus comes off
because of unusually shaped frames, set only one
rim and hold the other rim to trace.
See "4.3.1.4 Tracing goggle type frames" (p. 4-6).
Retracing starts automatically and
There is a difference in circumference between the
the LEDs beside
and
right and left rims. (Difference: 1 mm or more)
blink for a few seconds. Pressing
Trace a single rim and then process the lens.
does not read traced data.
The message "Use chuck for halfUse the adapter set for half-eye lenses. See "4.6.3.2
eye lens" appears and the
Processing half-eye lenses" (p. 4-53).
instrument stops.
During lens shape measurement,
the screen changes to the Bevel
simulation screen, and part of the
traced outline blinks.
Processing does not start though
is pressed.
A beep is produced.
The memory function cannot be
used.
The size of the set lens is not large enough to be
processed into the selected lens outline. The
blinking line indicates that the lens lacks in the part.
Press
to stop processing, and use a larger lens
or change the lens layout.
Processing does not start in the state where the
soundproof cover is open. Close the soundproof
cover. The instrument tries to process the same side
of lens. Press
to change the indication R or L to
process the opposite lens.
Set the "10) Ext. interface" parameter to "None".
A problem occurred in the instrument.
Press
to reset the instrument.
A maintenance message appears
Follow the maintenance message on the screen. If
and the instrument stops.
the message appears again, contact NIDEK or your
authorized distributor.
* In the event that a symptom cannot be eliminated by the corresponding suggestion above, contact
NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
§7
STORAGE
NOTE
• Store the instrument in an environment free from dust and direct sunlight.
Avoid storing the instrument in humid surroundings.
• If the instrument will not be used for a long time, unplug the power cable from the wall
outlet.
If settled dust in and on the instrument attracts moisture, it may cause short circuit or
fire.
1. Unplug the power cable from the wall outlet.
2. If the instrument will not be used for a long time, drain the water from the tank.
3. Shut the cover of the tracing unit and the soundproof cover.
4. Store accessories.
Store them in a customary place such as the drawer of the cabinet to avoid possible loss or
damage.
§8
MAINTENANCE
8.1 Wheel Dressing
A clogged wheel requires a longer time for processing and makes the finished size inaccurate. It is
necessary, therefore, to regularly dress the wheels.
CAUTION
• In the dressing mode, the cover sensor is released and the wheels turn with the
soundproof cover open. While dressing, work with special care.
• Be sure to wear protective glasses while dressing the wheel.
Spray including processing waste may damage your eyes.
• Be sure to select a proper dressing stick suited to the wheel type. See p. 3-4 for wheel
combination of each instrument type.
Using an improper dressing stick may damage the wheel and a lens may not be
processed properly.
Roughing wheel for glass lenses Ÿ Dressing stick for the roughing wheel (orange) WA80K
Finishing wheel Ÿ Dressing stick for the finishing wheel (white) WA320K
Polishing wheel Ÿ Dressing stick for the polishing wheel (light blue) WA4000 RH-20
Chamfering wheel Ÿ Dressing stick for the polishing wheel (white) WA320K
• Never dress the roughing wheel for plastic lenses.
It will damage the wheel for plastic lenses, and as a result, a lens may not be processed
properly any longer.
NOTE
• When processing is not completed within a certain period of time due to clogging of
the glass roughing wheel or finishing wheel, it is stopped and the “Rough Wheel Dressing
Reminder” or “Finish Wheel Dressing Reminder” message appears. According to the message,
dress the wheel.
• Pressing
during wheel dressing stops water from the chamber-cleaning nozzle to prevent
the chamber from getting soiled.
If water discharge from the chamber-cleaning nozzle has been stopped accidentally, press
again to resume discharging.
1. Call up the MENU screen.
Press
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖
‫ޓ‬
㧹
㧱
㧺
㨁
‫ޓ‬
㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧸㨑㨚㨓㨠㨔‫ޓ‬㧾㧦㧝㧢㧞㧚㧤㧟‫ޓ‬㧸㧦㧝㧢㧞㧚㧤㧟㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖㧱㨤㨑㨏㨡㨠㨑‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
.
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
2. Call up the Wheel dressing screen.
Align the pointer (o) to “Wheel dressing” with
and press
.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨍‫ޓ‬㨒㨛㨘㨘㨛㨣㨕㨚㨓‫ޓ‬㧿㨃‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㨣㨔㨑㨚‫ޓ‬㨚㨛㨠‫ޓ‬㨏㨔㨡㨏㨗㨕㨚㨓㧚‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧿㨀㧭㧾㨀‫ޓ‬㧦㧰㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨣㨍㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓ‬㨛㨚‫ޓ‬㧘‫ޓ‬㨛㨒㨒‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦㧿㨍㨒㨑㨠㨥‫ޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧿㨀㧻㧼‫ޓޓ‬㧦㧼㧭㨁㧿㧱‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀㧦㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
8-2
3. Open the soundproof cover.
4. Start dressing.
CAUTION
• Apply the end surface of the dressing stick to the wheel, not the corner or the edge.
Otherwise, the wheel may be damaged.
• Hold the dressing stick with both hands.
If the stick is held with one hand, the stick cannot be held strongly enough, the corner
of the stick may collide with the wheel and damage it.
• Hold the dressing stick so that its end is 2 - 3 cm away from your fingers.
If the stick is held closer than this distance, you may contact the wheels and fingers
may get hurt.
• Be sure to replace the dressing stick worn some 4 cm with the new one. Especially,
replace the dressing stick for the polishing wheel when it becomes shorter than 5 cm.
It is hard to hold a shortened dressing stick, and your fingers may get hurt or the
wheels may be damaged.
[Dressing the roughing wheel for glass lenses and the finishing wheel]
1) Press
.
Water will run for a few seconds and the wheels will begin to turn at the same time.
2) Wet the dressing stick well with running water.
3) Press
to stop the water.
4) Apply the dressing stick a little forcefully to
the turning wheel.
Keep applying it for about five seconds.
5) Press
.
Water will run to clean the wheel.
6) Repeat Steps 2) - 5) a few times.
7) Press
.
Water will stop running and the wheels will stop turning.
8-3
[Dressing the polishing wheel]
1) Press
.
Water will run for a few seconds and the wheels will begin to turn at the same time.
2) Wet the dressing stick well with running water.
3) Press
to stop the water.
4) Apply the dressing stick gently to the turning wheel.
Keep applying it for a few seconds.
5) Press
.
Water will run to clean the wheel.
6) Repeat Steps 2) - 5) four or five times.
7) Press
.
Water will stop running and the wheels will stop turning.
CAUTION
• After
is pressed, applying the dressing stick to the polishing wheel which is
turning by the force of inertia will damage the wheel and normal processing will not be
able to be performed.
• The dressing of the polishing wheel is intended to make the wheel surface smooth.
Gently apply the dressing stick so as not to scratch or streak the wheel surface.
NOTE
• Soak the dressing stick for the polishing wheel in water 10 minutes prior to dressing
the wheel.
8-4
[Dressing the chamfering wheel] (LE-9000SX Express only)
When chamfering glass lenses frequently, dress the chamfering wheel.
CAUTION
• Apply the dressing stick gently.
If the dressing stick is applied forcefully, it may affect the chamfering amount.
1) Press
.
The chamfering wheel will come out.
2) Wet the dressing stick well with running water.
3) Press
to stop the water.
4) Apply the dressing stick gently to the chamfering edge of the chamfering wheel.
5) Press
.
Water will run to clean the wheel.
6) Press
.
The chamfering wheel will be stored.
5. Press
after dressing.
The screen will go back to the MENU screen.
6. Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
twice.
[Grooving wheel]
The grooving wheel does not need to be dressed.
8-5
8.2 Replacing the Water and Filter (115 V regions)
The procedure differs depending on whether the optional FP-100 is equipped or not.
8.2.1 Replacing the water (when the optional FP-100 is equipped)
Replace the processing water and stocking filter in the tank periodically. It is recommended that the
water be replaced for every 100 lenses processed.
NOTE
• Do not mix antifoam agents with the processing water since the filter at the bottom of
the tank will be clogged, which prevents filtering.
• When the “Please Clean Tank & Pump and Replace Filter” message appears and the
processing is stopped, replace the processing water and stocking filter, and remove the
waste accumulated in the drain pipe connector.
1. Take the tank out of the cabinet.
Open the cabinet and draw the tank toward you.
Feedwater hoses
Drain pipe
Drain pipe connector
2. Disconnect the two feedwater hoses.
Press the red button on the hose to disconnect.
Filter joint
3. Disconnect the drain pipe from the tank.
Drain cover
4. Drop the stocking filter into the tank.
1) Remove the drain cover from the drain pipe
connector.
Drop the waste accumulated on top of the
drain cover into the tank.
2) Drop the stocking filter into the tank.
Stocking filter
5. Remove the lid of the tank and put the waste in the stocking filter into the tank.
1) Remove the lid of the cover.
2) Rip the stocking filter with a cutter and remove the waste and put it into the tank.
Proper waste filtration cannot be performed with the waste in the stocking filter. Put the
ripped stocking filter into the tank, as well.
8-6
6. Filter the processing water to separate the processing waste and water.
1) Connect the special hose of the FP-100 to the filter joint on the tank.
Press into the hose until you hear it click.
2) Set the function lever on the FP-100 to “FILTER”.
3) Turn on ( | ) the power switch on the FP-100.
The processing water is filtered by the filter at the bottom of the tank and only water is
sucked out into the FP-100.
All water will be sucked out from the tank in about one hour.
The timer turns off the power in one hour. (The time to turn the power off can be set by
turning the dial.)
4) If the water is left in the tank, turn the power switch on ( | ) again. After all water is sucked
out from the tank, turn the switch off ({) .
NOTE
• For finer filtration, shake the tank up and down about 10 times and filter any excess
water about 5 more minutes.
7. Dispose of the waste in the tank, following local governing ordinances.
Put a plastic bag, etc. over the tank and turn it upside down to remove the waste.
8. If the waste is stuck inside the tank, wash it out using a scrubber.
9. Throw away the filtered water in the FP-100.
1) Remove the hose of the FP-100 from the filter joint and bring it around the drain outlet.
Disconnect the hose while pressing the button on the joint.
2) Set the function lever on the FP-100 to “DRAIN”.
3) Turn on ( | ) the power switch on the FP-100.
The filtered water is drained. It takes a few minutes to drain all water.
4) When all water is drained, turn the switch off ({) and put the hose away.
NOTE
• If glass lenses have not been processed, the filtered water can be reused.
In such a case, put the hose disconnected from the filter joint in Step 1) into the tank
and perform Steps 2) - 4) to return the filter water back into the tank. Do not put the
lid over the hose then. The lid blocks the hose and it may cause a failure of the FP100.
8-7
10. Put the water into the tank up to the position
illustrated in the right figure.
Even when the filtered water is reused, add
required water.
Drain pipe connector
Guide of water volume
11. Put the lid on the tank.
12. Attach a new stocking filter to the drain pipe connector.
Stocking filters cannot be reused. Use a new one.
13. Set the drain cover as it was (see the figure
of Step 4).
Place the drain cover in the drain pipe connector on the tank.
Place it with the larger diameter side up.
Stocking filter
14. Put the tank back into the cabinet.
15. Connect the feedwater hoses and drain pipe.
Press into the feedwater hose until you hear it click.
NOTE
• As for both PUMP 1 and PUMP 2, be sure to connect the corresponding hoses.
8.2.2 Replacing the water (when the optional FP-100 is not equipped)
Replace the processing water and stocking filter in the tank periodically. It is recommended that
the water be replaced for every 100 lenses processed.
NOTE
• When the “Please Clean Tank & Pump and Replace Filter” message appears and the
processing is stopped, replace the processing water and remove the waste accumulated on
the drain pipe connector.
8-8
1. Take the tank out of the cabinet.
Open the cabinet and draw the tank toward you.
2. Disconnect the two feedwater hoses.
Press the red button on the hose to disconnect.
Feedwater hoses
Drain pipe
Drain pipe connector
3. Disconnect the drain pipe from the tank.
4. Drop the stocking filter into the tank.
1) Remove the drain cover from the drain pipe
connector.
Drop the waste accumulated on top of the
drain cover into the tank.
Drain cover
2) Bind the opening of the stocking filter so
that the waste will not come out and put it
in the tank.
5. Remove the lid from the tank.
6. Remove the layer at the top from the tank.
Stocking filter
7. Dispose of the waste in the tank, following local governing ordinances.
8. Put the water into the tank up to the position
illustrated in the right figure.
Drain pipe connector
NOTE
• Do not put a plastic sheet in the tank.
The pump fill may be blocked and it
may cause malfunction.
9. Put the lid on the tank.
Guide of water volume
8-9
10. Attach a new stocking filter to the drain pipe connector.
Stocking filters cannot be reused. Use a new one.
11. Set the drain cover as it was (see the figure
of Step 4).
Place the drain cover in the drain pipe connector on the tank.
Place it with the larger diameter side up.
Stocking filter
12. Put the tank back into the cabinet.
13. Connect the feedwater hoses and drain pipe.
Press into the feedwater hose until you hear it click.
NOTE
• As for both PUMP 1 and PUMP 2, be sure to connect the corresponding hoses.
8 - 10
8.3 Replacing the Water and Filter (230 V regions)
Replace the processing water and stocking filter in the tank periodically. It is recommended that the
water be replaced for every 100 lenses processed.
NOTE
• When the “Please Clean Tank & Pump and Replace Filter” message appears and the
processing is stopped, replace the processing water and stocking filter, and remove the
waste accumulated on the drain pipe connector.
Red button
1. Take the tank out of the cabinet.
Open the cabinet and draw the tank toward you.
2. Disconnect the two feedwater hoses.
Press the red button on the hose to disconnect.
3. Disconnect the drain pipe from the tank.
4. Remove the stocking filter held with a rubber band on the cover.
Drop the stocking filter with the opening bound into the tank so that the processing water will
not come out.
5. Remove the lid of the tank.
6. Drain the water skimmed off the surface.
7. Dispose of the waste and stocking filter in the tank, following local governing ordinances.
8. Wash the filter attached to the cover.
Filter
8 - 11
9. Put the water into the tank.
Put the water up to 80% (about 5 cm from the
top).
The waste disposal becomes easier by spreading
a plastic sheet in the tank in advance.
10. Attach a new stocking filter.
Pass the stocking filter from the inside of the
cover into the metal fitting and hold it with a
rubber band.
CAUTION
Rubber band
Stocking filter
• Use the stocking filter only that NIDEK specifies.
Other stockings may become clogged or cause the feedwater hose clogged.
• The stocking filter is a disposable article. Do not reuse it.
Otherwise, it may be ripped or run and will not function as a filter.
11. Put the lid on the tank.
12. Put the tank back into the cabinet.
13. Connect the feedwater hoses and drain pipe.
Press into the feedwater hose until you hear it click.
NOTE
• Each feedwater hose must be connected to its original position.
8 - 12
8.4 Replacing Fuses
If the instrument can not be activated though the power switch is turned on, the fuses may be blown.
Replace the fuses with new ones.
CAUTION
• Be sure to turn off the power switch and pull out the power cable before replacing
fuses.
You may get electric shock.
• Use the specified fuses only:
(115 V ACo T 12.5 A 250 V)
(230 V ACo T 6.3 A 250 V)
Fuses other than the specified ones may cause fire.
1. Turn off ({) the power switch and disconnect the power cable from the wall outlet.
2. Disconnect the power cable from the inlet.
3. Remove the fuse holder under the inlet.
Pull out the fuse holder by pressing the lever.
4. Remove the old fuses from the holder and
replace them with new ones.
Lever
5. Push the fuse holder into the body as before.
Fuse holder
8.5 Cleaning the Exterior
When the exterior of the instrument such as the covers or panels become soiled, wipe them with
a soft cloth. For stubborn soiling, immerse a cloth in a neutral detergent, wring it well, and wipe
the area. Wipe off with a dry cloth to finish.
CAUTION
• Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner.
This could dissolve the surface.
8 - 13
8.6 Size Adjustment
When a processed lens is mounted into the frame, the lens size does not always fit. In such cases,
adjust the size by inputting the compensation value as follows.
1. Call up the MENU screen.
Press
.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖
‫ޓ‬
㧹
㧱
㧺
㨁
‫ޓ‬
㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧸㨑㨚㨓㨠㨔‫ޓ‬㧾㧦㧝㧢㧞㧚㧤㧟‫ޓ‬㧸㧦㧝㧢㧞㧚㧤㧟㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖㧱㨤㨑㨏㨡㨠㨑‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
2. Call up the Parameter exchange mode screen.
Press
again.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㨍㨞㨍㨙㨑㨠㨑㨞‫ޓ‬㨑㨤㨏㨔㨍㨚㨓㨑‫ޓ‬㨙㨛㨐㨑‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㨂㨑㨞㧚‫ޓ‬㧹㧭㧿㨀㧱㧾‫ޓ‬㨂㧝㧚㧜㧤㧚㧝㧝‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㨀㧾㧭㧯㧱㧾‫ޓ‬㨂㧞㧚㧜㧝‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㨀㨅㧼㧱‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㧸㧠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
ψ‫ޓ‬㧸㧭㧺㧳㨁㧭㧳㧱‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧱㧺㧳㧸㧵㧿㧴㧔㧿㧕‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧝㧕‫ޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨜㨞㨑㨟㨑㨠㧔㧼㧸㧭㧘㧹㨀㧸㧕㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧞㧕‫ޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨜㨞㨑㨟㨑㨠㧔㧼㧸㧭㧘㧯㧱㧸㧕㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧟㧕‫ޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨜㨞㨑㨟㨑㨠㧔㧳㧸㧿㧘㧹㨀㧸㧕㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
3. Adjust the size.
1) Align the pointer (o) to the desired item with
.
To adjust the finished size of plastic, high index plastic, acrylic resin, trivex, and polycarbonate
lenses, specify as follows:
Metal frameso
“Size preset (PLA, MTL)”
Celluloid frameso “Size preset (PLA, CEL)”
To adjust the finished size of glass lenses, specify as follows:
Metal frameso
“Size preset (GLS, MTL)”
Celluloid frameso “Size preset (GLS, CEL)”
2) Input the compensation value with
or
.
The compensation value changes the finished lens diameter. To change the lens diameter,
input the value.
If the gap at the rim joint is A mm when the processed glass lens is mounted in a metal
frame, divide the gap into the number S (approx. 3). The calculated value is an excess lens
diameter.
e.g.
For the gap of 1 mm:
–1/3 × 1 (mm) = approx. –0.3 (mm)
Gap
Subtract 0.3 mm from the displayed
value of “Finish Size (GLS, bevel)”.
8 - 14
4. Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
.
5. Repeat Steps 1 - 4 until the lens size just fits the frame.
8.7 Adjusting the Bevel Position
When the finished bevel of a lens is displaced from the designated position, adjust the bevel position by
changing the bevel constant.
1. Check the bevel position.
1) Trace frames.
2) Process a lens of SPH: 0.0 D - +1.0 D.
Not good
Good
Not good
3) Check the part where the edge is rather thin
to see if the point of the bevel is in the middle
of the edge.
If the bevel is leaning to either side, adjust
it by the following procedure.
2. Call up the MENU screen.
Press
.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖
‫ޓ‬
㧹
㧱
㧺
㨁
‫ޓ‬
㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧸㨑㨚㨓㨠㨔‫ޓ‬㧾㧦㧝㧢㧞㧚㧤㧟‫ޓ‬㧸㧦㧝㧢㧞㧚㧤㧟㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖㧱㨤㨑㨏㨡㨠㨑‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
8 - 15
3. Call up the Bevel adjustment screen.
Align the pointer (o) to “Bevel adjustment”
and press
.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓ‬ψ㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㨍㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬ψ㧝㧚㧞㧡㨙㨙
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
4. Input the compensation value.
To shift the bevel toward the front side of the
.
lens, press
To shift toward the rear side, press
.
The arrow m shows that the bevel is moved
toward the front side, and o shows that it is
moved toward the rear side.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓ‬ψ㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㨍㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬ψ㧜㧚㧣㧡㨙㨙
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
5. Go back to the MENU screen.
Press
.
6. Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
twice.
7. Repeat Steps 1 - 6 until the bevel comes to the right position.
8 - 16
8.8 Adjusting the Axis Shift
8.8.1 Adjusting the axis shift for unpolished lenses
When the finished axis angle of a lens is shifted from the designated angle, adjust it as follows.
1. Call up the MENU screen.
Press
.
2. Call up the AXIS adjustment screen.
Align the pointer (o) to “AXIS adjustment”
and press
.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ㧼㧸㧭‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧸㧭‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧯‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧯‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㧸㧿‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㧸㧿‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
3. Adjust the axis angle.
For polycarbonate, trivex, glass, and other lenses, adjust the axis angle respectively in each
processing type such as Beveling (Auto, Guided, and EX) and Flat (Rimless) edging.
Item
• Beveling polycarbonate and trivex lenses:
PC AXS const. (bevel)
• Flat edging polycarbonate and trivex lenses:
PC AXS const. (flat)
• Beveling glass lenses (except for Type PLB):
GLS AXS const. (bevel)
• Flat edging glass lenses (except for Type PLB):
GLS AXS const. (flat)
• Beveling lenses other than polycarbonate and glass:
PLA AXS const. (bevel)
• Flat edging lenses other than polycarbonate and glass:
PLA AXS const. (flat)
Add the compensation value to the AXIS constant value displayed on the screen to adjust the
axis angle.
e.g. 1
If the finished axis angle became 1º while
the prescribed angle was 180º, add 1.00 to
the present value.
Setting value: +2.00 o +3.00
e.g. 2
If the finished axis angle became 179º while
the prescribed angle was 180º, subtract 1.00
from the present value.
Setting value: +2.00 o+1.00
1º
180º
180º
179º
8 - 17
4. Go back to the MENU screen.
Press
.
5. Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
twice.
6. Repeat Steps 1 - 5 until the correct axis angle is obtained.
8 - 18
8.9 Adjusting the Lens Margin Allowed for Finishing
The lens margin is compensated by the following procedure.
1. Call up the MENU screen.
Press
.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖
‫ޓ‬
㧹
㧱
㧺
㨁
‫ޓ‬
㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧸㨑㨚㨓㨠㨔‫ޓ‬㧾㧦㧝㧠㧟㧚㧣㧤‫ޓ‬㧸㧦㧝㧠㧟㧚㧣㧢㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
2. Call up the Size adjustment screen.
Align the pointer (o) to “Size adjustment” and
press
.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧸㧭㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧸㧭㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧯㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧯㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧳㧸㧿㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧳㧸㧿㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
3. Adjust the lens margin.
1) Align the pointer (o) to the desired item
with
.
‫ޓޓ‬㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧴㧼㧸㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧾㨛㨡㨓㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧸㧭㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦㧗㧝㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
㧾㨛㨡㨓㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧸㧭㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦㧗㧝㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧾㨛㨡㨓㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧯㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧾㨛㨡㨓㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧯㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦㧗㧝㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧾㨛㨡㨓㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧳㧸㧿㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓ‬ψ㧾㨛㨡㨓㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧳㧸㧿㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧾㨛㨡㨓㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧴㧼㧸㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
To adjust the beveled lens margin, specify as follows:
Plastic and acrylic resin lenseso
“Rough size (PLA, bevel)”
Polycarbonate and trivex lenseso
“Rough size (PC, bevel)”
Glass lenseso
“Rough size (GLS, bevel)” (except for Type PLB)
High index plastic lenseso
“Rough size (HPL, bevel)”
To adjust the flat edged lens margin (including grooved lenses), specify as follows:
Plastic and acrylic resin lenseso
“Rough size (PLA, flat)”
Polycarbonate and trivex lenseso
“Rough size (PC, flat)”
Glass lenseso
“Rough size (GLS, flat)” (except for Type PLB)
High index plastic lenseso
“Rough size (HPL, flat)”
2) Input the compensation value with
or
.
Adding the value will increase the lens margin allowed for finishing.
8 - 19
4. Go back to the MENU screen.
Press
.
5. Go back to the Layout screen.
twice.
Press
8.10 PD Adjustment
If the PD value input on the Layout screen does not agree with the PD of the finished lens, adjust the PD
amount of the finished lens by the following procedure.
1. Call up the MENU screen.
Press
.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖
‫ޓ‬
㧹
㧱
㧺
㨁
‫ޓ‬
㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧸㨑㨚㨓㨠㨔‫ޓ‬㧾㧦㧝㧠㧟㧚㧣㧤‫ޓ‬㧸㧦㧝㧠㧟㧚㧣㧢㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
2. Call up the PD adjustment screen.
Align the pointer (o) to “PD adjustment” and
press
.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㨍㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧗㧜㧚㧡㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧲㨞㨍㨙㨑‫ޓ‬㨀㨕㨘㨠‫ޓ‬㧭㨚㨓㨘㨑㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧡㧚㧜q‫ޓޓ‬
3. Adjust the PD.
Input the compensation value with
or
.
Adding the value will increase the finished PD.
e.g.
When the finished PD becomes 65.5 by inputting PD: 66.0, add 0.50 to the present value.
4. Go back to the MENU screen.
Press
.
5. Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
twice.
8 - 20
8.11 Adjustment for Polishing
8.11.1 If part of an edge is left unpolished (Types PL4, PLB, and PLB-2R)
1. Call up the MENU screen.
Press
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖
‫ޓ‬
㧹
㧱
㧺
㨁
‫ޓ‬
㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧸㨑㨚㨓㨠㨔‫ޓ‬㧾㧦㧝㧠㧟㧚㧣㧤‫ޓ‬㧸㧦㧝㧠㧟㧚㧣㧢㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
.
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
2. Call up the Size adjustment screen.
Align the pointer (o) to “Size adjustment” and
press
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
.
‫ޓ‬ψ㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧸㧭㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧸㧭㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧯㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧯㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧳㧸㧿㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧳㧸㧿㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
3. Adjust the amount by which a lens is pressed
against the wheel.
‫ޓ‬㧼㨛㨘㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧯㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㨛㨘㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧴㧼㧸㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㨛㨘㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧴㧼㧸㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
1) Align the pointer (o) to the item with
.
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧻㧸‫ޓ‬㧰㨕㨒㨒㨑㨞㨑㨚㨠㨕㨍㨘㧔㧼㧯㧕‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦㧗㧜㧚㧞㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㨛㨘㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨘㨑㨢㨑㨘㧔㧼㧸㧭㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕㧦㧗㧜㧚㧟㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㨛㨘㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨘㨑㨢㨑㨘㧔㧼㧸㧭㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦㧗㧜㧚㧞㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓ‬ψ㧼㨛㨘㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨘㨑㨢㨑㨘㧔㧼㧯㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦㧗㧜㧚㧟㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㨛㨘㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨘㨑㨢㨑㨘㧔㧼㧯㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦㧗㧜㧚㧞㧜㨙㨙
Polishing the beveled edge of plastic, high index plastic, and acrylic resin lenses:
“Polish level (PLA, bevel)”
Polishing the flat edge of plastic, high index plastic, and acrylic resin lenses:
“Polish level (PLA, flat)”
Polishing the beveled edge of polycarbonate and trivex lenses:
“Polish level (PC, bevel)”
Polishing the flat edge of polycarbonate and trivex lenses:
“Polish level (PC, flat)”
2) Input the compensation value with
or
.
If the value increases, the pressed amount against the wheel also increases.
NOTE
• If a large amount is added at once, the polished edge may become rough. Increase the
amount by 0.1 mm and check the polished edge each time the base value is changed.
Never increase the constant value to 0.5 mm or more.
8 - 21
4. Go back to the MENU screen.
Press
.
5. Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
twice.
6. Repeat Steps 1 - 5 until the whole edge is polished evenly.*1
7. Check the finished size after polishing.
Check each material lens for beveling and flat edging (only flat edging of Type PL4).
1) Call up the I45 internal data.
Press
while holding
on the Layout screen.
2) Polish the beveled lens or flat edged lens.
Leave the Size indication at 0.
3) Check the finished size.
If the edged lens diameter is as follows, it is
proper.
Beveled lens: 45.00 - 45.10 mm (dia.)
Flat edged lens: 45.00 - 45.10 mm (dia.)
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧠㧤
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧴㧼㧸㧼㧺㨀‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧻㧸‫ޓޓ‬㧾
8. If the finished lens size is too large or too small, adjust the polishing size.
1) Call up the MENU screen.
Press
.
2) Call up the Size adjustment screen.
Align the pointer (o) to “Size adjustment”
and press
.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧸㧭㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧸㧭㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧯㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧯㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧳㧸㧿㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧲㨕㨚㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧳㧸㧿㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
*1 If the lens edge is not polished completely even though the constant value was adjusted, the
axis angle may have shifted while the edge was being polished. In such a case, input the
compensation value displayed at “POL AXS const. (bevel)” or “POL AXS const. (flat)” as
described in “8.11.3 Axis shift adjustment for polished lenses” (p. 8-24).
8 - 22
3) Align the pointer (o) to the desired item with
.
To adjust the beveled lens margin, specify as follows:
Plastic and acrylic resin lenseso
“Polish size (PLA, bevel)”
Polycarbonate and trivex lenseso
“Polish size (PC, bevel)”
High index plastic lenseso
“Rough size (HPL, bevel)”
To adjust the flat edged lens margin (including grooved lens), specify as follows:
Plastic and acrylic resin lenseso
“Polish size (PLA, flat)”
Polycarbonate and trivex lenseso
“Polish size (PC, flat)”
High index plastic lenseso
“Polish size (HPL, flat)”
4) Input the compensation value with
or
e.g.
If the edged lens diameter became 45.5 mm,
subtract 0.50 from the present value.
Setting value:
0.00 mm o0.50 mm
.
‫ޓޓ‬㧾㨛㨡㨓㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧴㧼㧸㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦㧗㧝㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㨛㨘㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧸㧭㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕㧦㧗㧝㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㨛㨘㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧸㧭㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦㧗㧝㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㨛㨘㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧯㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦㧗㧝㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
㧼㨛㨘㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧼㧯㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㨛㨘㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧴㧼㧸㧘㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕㧦㧗㧝㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓ‬ψ㧼㨛㨘㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨟㨕㨦㨑㧔㧴㧼㧸㧘㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧻㧸‫ޓ‬㧰㨕㨒㨒㨑㨞㨑㨚㨠㨕㨍㨘㧔㧼㧯㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
5) Go back to the MENU screen.
Press
.
6) Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
twice.
9. Repeat Steps 7 - 8 until the correct lens size is obtained.
8 - 23
8.11.2 If the front edge or rear edge is left unpolished
(Types PLB and PLB-2R)
The polished bevel position is adjusted by the following procedure.
1. Call up the MENU screen.
Press
.
2. Call up the Size adjustment screen.
Align the pointer (o) to “Bevel adjustment”
and press
.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓ‬ψ㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㨍㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬ψ㧝㧚㧞㧡㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㨛㨘㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
3. Adjust the polished bevel position.
1) Align the pointer (o) to “Polish bevel
const.”.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㨍㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬ψ㧝㧚㧞㧡㨙㨙
‫ޓ‬ψ㧼㨛㨘㨕㨟㨔‫ޓ‬㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
2) Input the compensation value.
If the beveled edge on the lens front side is
left unpolished:
Press
.
If the beveled edge on the lens rear side is
left unpolished:
Press
.
4. Go back to the MENU screen.
Press
.
5. Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
twice.
6. Repeat Steps 1 - 5 until both sides of the edge are polished properly.
o
m
8 - 24
8.11.3Axis shift adjustment for polished lenses (Types PL4, PLB, and PLB-2R)
If the lens edge is not polished completely even after adjustment is made with “POL Differential”, the
axis angle may be shifted. Adjust the axis angle by the following procedure.
1. Check the state of the polished lens.
Check beveling and flat edging (only flat edging of Type PL4).
1) Call up the F 45 internal data.
Press
while holding
down on the Layout screen.
2) Perform beveling or polishing of the flat
edge.
Leave the Size indication at 0.
3) Check the state of the polished lens.
If the lens edge is not polished completely,
perform the adjustment as follows.
2. Call up the MENU screen.
Press
.
㧹㧵㧺‫ޓޓ‬㧢㧢
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧲㧼㧰㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㧦㧢㧞㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧚‫ޓ‬
㧿㧵㨆㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧭㧯㨀‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧹㧱㧹㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
㧼㧸㧭㧼㧺㨀‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧻㧸‫ޓޓ‬㧾
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖
‫ޓ‬
㧹
㧱
㧺
㨁
‫ޓ‬
㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧸㨑㨚㨓㨠㨔‫ޓ‬㧾㧦㧝㧠㧟㧚㧣㧤‫ޓ‬㧸㧦㧝㧠㧟㧚㧣㧢㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
3. Call up the AXIS adjustment screen.
Align the pointer (o) to “AXIS adjustment”
and press
.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ㧼㧸㧭‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧸㧭‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧯‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧯‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧻㧸‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧻㧸‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
4. Adjust the axis angle.
Adjust the axis values for beveling and flat edging.
Item
• Beveling: POL AXS const. (bevel)
• Flat edging:POL AXS const. (flat)
Add the compensation value to the AXIS constant value displayed on the screen to adjust the
axis angle.
8 - 25
e.g.
As seen from the front of the lens, the upper
left side is not polished, add 0.50 to the
present value.
Setting value: +1.00 o +1.50
e.g.
As seen from the front of the lens, the upper
right side is not polished, subtract 0.50 from
the present value.
Setting value: +1.00 o +0.50
5. Go back to the MENU screen.
Press
.
6. Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
twice.
7. Repeat Steps 1 - 6 until the whole lens edge is polished.
8 - 26
8.12 Adjustment for Grooving (LE-9000SX Express only)
8.12.1 Setting the initial value for depth and width
(LE-9000 SX Express only)
1. Call up the MENU screen.
Press
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖
‫ޓ‬
㧹
㧱
㧺
㨁
‫ޓ‬
㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧸㨑㨚㨓㨠㨔‫ޓ‬㧾㧦㧝㧠㧟㧚㧣㧤‫ޓ‬㧸㧦㧝㧠㧟㧚㧣㧢㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
.
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
2. Call up the Groove & SFB adjustment screen.
Align the pointer (o) to “Groove & SFB
adjustment” and press
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧒‫ޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
.
o) to the desired item with
3. Align the pointer (o
.
Groove Depth: F . F mm
Factory setting: 0.3 [mm]
Setting range: 0.0 - 0.8 [mm]
Groove Width: F . F mm
Factory setting: 0.6 [mm]
Setting range: 0.6 - 1.2 [mm]
4. Change the initial value with
5. Go back to the MENU screen.
Press
.
6. Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
twice.
㧖㧱㨤㨑㨏㨡㨠㨑‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
or
.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧒‫ޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧰㨑㨜㨠㨔‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧚㧟㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧚㧢㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧼㨛㨟㨕㨠㨕㨛㨚‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㨍㨒㨑㨠㨥‫ޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㧹㨛㨐㨑‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾‫ޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨎㨢㨘㧘㨒㨞㨛㨚㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧞㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨎㨢㨘㧘㨞㨑㨍㨞㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧟㨙㨙
8 - 27
8.12.2 Adjusting the groove position (LE-9000 SX Express only)
When the groove of a lens is finished to be displaced from the designated position, adjust the groove
position by changing the groove constant.
1. Check the groove position.
1) Perform grooving with G CRV: 5 : 5 and
PNT: 0.0.
2) Check if the point of the groove is in the
middle of the edge.
If the groove is leaning to either side, adjust
it by the following procedure.
2. Call up the MENU screen.
Press
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
㧳%48㧦‫ޓ‬㧡㧦㧡
‫ޓ‬
㧼㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧜‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬㧚
‫ޓ‬㧚
㧰㧱㧼㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧢
‫ޓ‬㧚
㨃㧵㧰㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧢㧳㨁㧵‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖
‫ޓ‬
㧹
㧱
㧺
㨁
‫ޓ‬
㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧸㨑㨚㨓㨠㨔‫ޓ‬㧾㧦㧝㧠㧟㧚㧣㧤‫ޓ‬㧸㧦㧝㧠㧟㧚㧣㧢㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
.
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
3. Call up the Groove & SFB adjustment screen.
Align the pointer (o) to “Groove & SFB
adjustment” and press
.
o) to “Groove Position”.
4. Align the pointer (o
㧖㧱㨤㨑㨏㨡㨠㨑‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧒‫ޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧒‫ޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧰㨑㨜㨠㨔‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧚㧟㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧚㧢㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧼㨛㨟㨕㨠㨕㨛㨚‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㨍㨒㨑㨠㨥‫ޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㧹㨛㨐㨑‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾‫ޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨎㨢㨘㧘㨒㨞㨛㨚㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧞㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨎㨢㨘㧘㨞㨑㨍㨞㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧟㨙㨙
8 - 28
5. Input the compensation value of the groove
position.
To shift the groove toward the front side of the
lens, press
.
To shift toward the rear side, press
.
The arrow m shows that the groove is moved
toward the front side, and o shows that it is
moved toward the rear side.
6. Go back to the MENU screen.
Press
.
7. Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
twice.
8. Repeat Steps 1 - 7 until the groove position comes to the right position.
8.12.3 Adjusting the groove depth (LE-9000SX Express only)
8.12.3.1 Groove depth is not made as designated (LE-9000SX Express only)
Groove depth must be even in circumference. However, if the grooving is not made at the designated
depth, adjust it by changing the constant value of the grooving wheel position.
1. Call up the MENU screen.
Press
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖
‫ޓ‬
㧹
㧱
㧺
㨁
‫ޓ‬
㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧸㨑㨚㨓㨠㨔‫ޓ‬㧾㧦㧝㧠㧟㧚㧣㧤‫ޓ‬㧸㧦㧝㧠㧟㧚㧣㧢㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
.
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
2. Call up the Groove & SFB adjustment screen.
㧖㧱㨤㨑㨏㨡㨠㨑‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
Align the pointer (o) to “Groove & SFB
adjustment” and press
.
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧒‫ޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
8 - 29
o) to “SFB Wheel Height”.
3. Align the pointer (o
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧒‫ޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧰㨑㨜㨠㨔‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧚㧟㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧚㧢㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧼㨛㨟㨕㨠㨕㨛㨚‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㨍㨒㨑㨠㨥‫ޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㧹㨛㨐㨑‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾‫ޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨎㨢㨘㧘㨒㨞㨛㨚㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧞㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨎㨢㨘㧘㨞㨑㨍㨞㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧟㨙㨙
4. Input the compensation value of SFB wheel
height.
To make the groove shallower, press
.
To make the groove deeper, press
.
5. Go back to the MENU screen.
Press
.
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧼㨛㨟㨕㨠㨕㨛㨚‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㨍㨒㨑㨠㨥‫ޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㧹㨛㨐㨑‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾‫ޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨎㨢㨘㧘㨒㨞㨛㨚㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧞㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨎㨢㨘㧘㨞㨑㨍㨞㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧟㨙㨙
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧘㨒㨞㨛㨚㨠㧕㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧞㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧘㨞㨑㨍㨞㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧟㨙㨙
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㧴㨑㨕㨓㨔㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㧼㨛㨟㧚㧔㧮㨂㧸㧘㧲㧕㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
6. Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
twice.
7. Repeat Steps 1 - 6 until the correct groove depth is achieved.
8.12.3.2 Groove depth is uneven (LE-9000SX Express only)
The axis angle of the grooving wheel may be shifted. Perform the following adjustment.
1. Call up the MENU screen.
Press
.
2. Call up the AXIS adjustment screen.
Align the pointer (o) to “AXIS adjustment”
and press
.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ㧼㧸㧭‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧸㧭‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧯‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧯‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㧸㧿‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㧸㧿‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
8 - 30
o) to “PLA GROOVE AXS
3. Align the pointer (o
const” or “PC GROOVE AXS const” with
.
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧯‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㧸㧿‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㧸㧿‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧻㧸‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
Groove depth of polycarbonate or trivex
lenses is uneven:
Specify “PC GROOVE AXS const”.
Groove depth of other lenses is uneven:
Specify “PLA GROOVE AXS const”.
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧸㧭‫ޓ‬㧳㧾㧻㧻㨂㧱‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧸㧭‫ޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓ‬ψ㧼㧯‫ޓ‬㧳㧾㧻㧻㨂㧱‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧯‫ޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
4. Adjust the axis angle.
Add the compensation value to the AXIS constant value displayed on the screen to adjust the
axis angle.
e.g.
If the axis angle of a grooved lens became
1º as viewed from the lens front surface, add
1.00 to the present value.
Setting value: +2.00 o +3.00
5. Go back to the MENU screen.
Press
.
6. Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
twice.
7. Repeat Steps 1 - 6 until the groove depth becomes even.
1º
180º
8 - 31
8.13 Adjustment for Chamfering (LE-9000SX Express only)
8.13.1 Setting the SFB mode and chamfering amount
(LE-9000SX Express only)
1. Call up the MENU screen.
Press
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖
‫ޓ‬
㧹
㧱
㧺
㨁
‫ޓ‬
㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧸㨑㨚㨓㨠㨔‫ޓ‬㧾㧦㧝㧠㧟㧚㧣㧤‫ޓ‬㧸㧦㧝㧠㧟㧚㧣㧢㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
.
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
2. Call up the Groove & SFB adjustment screen.
Align the pointer (o) to “Groove & SFB
adjustment” and press
.
o) to the desired item with
3. Align the pointer o
.
㧖㧱㨤㨑㨏㨡㨠㨑‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧒‫ޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧒‫ޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧰㨑㨜㨠㨔‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧚㧟㨙㨙
Safety Bevel Mode: F & R, R
Factory setting: R
F & R:
Chamfering of both edges.
R:
Chamfering of the rear edge in beveling.
Chamfering of the both edges in flat edging.
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧚㧢㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧼㨛㨟㨕㨠㨕㨛㨚‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㨍㨒㨑㨠㨥‫ޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㧹㨛㨐㨑‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾‫ޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨎㨢㨘㧘㨒㨞㨛㨚㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧞㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨎㨢㨘㧘㨞㨑㨍㨞㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧟㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧰㨑㨜㨠㨔‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧚㧟㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧚㧢㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㨞㨛㨛㨢㨑‫ޓ‬㧼㨛㨟㨕㨠㨕㨛㨚‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
SFB Width (bvl, front): F . F mm
Factory setting: +0.2 [mm]
This is a guide setting for the chamfering
amount of the front SFB in beveling.
SFB Width (bvl, rear): F . F mm
Factory setting: +0.3 [mm]
This is a guide setting for the chamfering
amount of the rear SFB in beveling.
SFB Width (flat, front): F . F mm
Factory setting: +0.2 [mm]
This is a guide setting for the chamfering
amount of the front SFB in flat edging.
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㨍㨒㨑㨠㨥‫ޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㧹㨛㨐㨑‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧾‫ޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨎㨢㨘㧘㨒㨞㨛㨚㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧞㨙㨙
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨎㨢㨘㧘㨞㨑㨍㨞㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧟㨙㨙
‫ޓ‬ψ㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧘㨒㨞㨛㨚㨠㧕㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧞㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧘㨞㨑㨍㨞㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧟㨙㨙
Front SFB amount
Rear SFB amount
8 - 32
SFB Width (flat, rear): F . F mm
Factory setting: +0.3 [mm]
This is a guide setting for the chamfering
amount of the rear SFB in flat edging.
4. Change the setting with
or
Front SFB amount
Rear SFB amount
.
5. Go back to the MENU screen.
Press
.
6. Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
twice.
8.13.2 Adjusting the chamfering amount (LE-9000SX Express only)
8.13.2.1 Safety bevel is not made as designated (LE-9000SX Express only)
A chamfering amount must be even in circumference. If chamfering is not performed by the
designated width, however, adjust the chamfering amount by changing the compensation value
of the chamfering wheel position.
1. Set the “SFB Width” parameter to 0.0 mm.
See “8.13.1 Setting the SFB mode and chamfering amount” (p. 8-31).
To adjust the amount of the front SFB in beveling:
Set the “SFB Width (bvl, front)” parameterto 0.0 mm.
To adjust the amount of the rear SFB in beveling:
Set the “SFB Width (bvl, rear)” parameter to 0.0 mm.
To adjust the amount of the front SFB in flat edging:
Set the “SFB Width (flat, front)” parameter to 0.0 mm.
To adjust the amount of the rear SFB in flat edging:
Set the “SFB Width (flat, rear)” parameter to 0.0 mm.
2. Chamfer a lens.
3. Check the condition of the front SFB.
If the chamfered amount of the front safety bevel becomes 0 in the state that the chamfering
wheel is in contact with the lens’ front edge, it is normal. If not, correct the constant value of
the safety bevel by the following procedure.
8 - 33
4. Input the compensation value of the SFB wheel position on the Groove & SFB adjustment
screen.
1) Call up the MENU screen.
2) Align the pointer (o) to “Groove & SFB adjustment” and press
.
3) Align the pointer (o) to the desired item.
To adjust the front SFB in beveling:
Set the “SFB Wheel Pos. (BVL, F)” parameter to 0.0 mm.
To adjust the rear SFB in beveling:
Set the “SFB Wheel Pos. (BVL, R)” parameter to 0.0 mm.
To adjust the front SFB in flat edging:
Set the “SFB Wheel Pos. (FLT, F)” parameter to 0.0 mm.
To adjust the rear SFB in flat edging:
Set the “SFB Wheel Pos. (FLT, R)” parameter to 0.0 mm.
4) Input the compensation value of the SFB
wheel position.
To decrease the chamfering amount (move
.
the wheel away from the lens), press
To increase the chamfering amount (move
the wheel toward the lens), press
.
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨎㨢㨘㧘㨞㨑㨍㨞㧕‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧟㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧘㨒㨞㨛㨚㨠㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧞㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨕㨐㨠㨔㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧘㨞㨑㨍㨞㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧗㧜㧚㧟㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㧴㨑㨕㨓㨔㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㧼㨛㨟㧚㧔㧮㨂㧸㧘㧲㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㧼㨛㨟㧚㧔㧮㨂㧸㧘㧾㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓ‬ψ㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㧼㨛㨟㧚㧔㧲㧸㨀㧘㧲㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
‫ޓޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㧼㨛㨟㧚㧔㧲㧸㨀㧘㧾㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜㨙㨙
5. Go back to the MENU screen.
Press
.
6. Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
twice.
7. Repeat Steps 1 - 6 until the chamfering wheel contacts the front edge of the lens and the
front SFB becomes 0.
8 - 34
8.13.2.2 Chamfering amount is uneven (LE-9000SX Express only)
If the chamfering amount is uneven in circumference, the chamfering axis angle may be shifted. Adjust
the chamfering axis angle.
1. Call up the MENU screen.
Press
.
2. Call up the AXIS adjustment screen.
Align the pointer (o) to “AXIS adjustment”
and press
.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧖㧱㨄㧵㨀‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㧿㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ㧼㧸㧭‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧸㧭‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧯‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧯‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㧸㧿‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㧸㧿‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
3. Align the pointer (o
o ) to “PLA SFB AXS
const” or “PC SFB AXS const” with
.
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧯‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㧸㧿‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨎㨑㨢㨑㨘㧕‫ޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧳㧸㧿‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
Chamfering amount of polycarbonate or
trivex lenses is uneven:
Specify “PC SFB AXS const”.
Chamfering amount of other lenses is
uneven:
Specify “PLA SFB AXS const”.
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧻㧸‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠㧚㧔㨒㨘㨍㨠㧕‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧸㧭‫ޓ‬㧳㧾㧻㧻㨂㧱‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠‫ޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧸㧭‫ޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓޓ‬㧼㧯‫ޓ‬㧳㧾㧻㧻㨂㧱‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠‫ޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
‫ޓ‬ψ㧼㧯‫ޓ‬㧿㧲㧮‫ޓ‬㧭㨄㧿‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨚㨟㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧚㧜㧜
4. Adjust the axis angle.
Add the compensation value to the AXIS constant value displayed on the screen to adjust the
axis angle.
e.g. 1
If the axis angle of a chamfered lens became
1º as viewed from the lens’ front surface,
add 1.00 to the present value.
Setting value: +2.00 o +3.00
e.g. 2
If the axis angle of a chamfered lens became
1º as viewed from the lens’ rear surface,
subtract 1.00 from the present value.
Setting value: +2.00 o+1.00
5. Go back to the MENU screen.
Press
.
1º
180º
8 - 35
6. Go back to the Layout screen.
Press
twice.
7. Repeat Steps 1 - 6 until the chamfering amount becomes even.
8.14 Tracer Calibration
Perform calibration of the tracer using the provided standard frames or standard pattern. It is
recommended to perform calibration at the time of start to ensure the accuracy of tracing. If an
error occurs in circumference, also perform calibration.
1. Perform calibration with the standard frames.
1) Set the provided standard frames (F45) into
the tracer.
Set the standard frames, with the side
inscribed with the number face up, fitting
the rim clips into the grooves of the frames.
2) Press
while holding
down.
The LED beside
will blink.
3) Press
.
Calibration will be performed.
Calibration is completed after a few tracings. After the electronic beeper sounds, the tracer
exits from the calibration mode and the standard frames are released.
NOTE
• To avoid calibration with frames other than the standard frames, if the circumference
exceeds the correction value of ±1 mm, the LED beside
will blink and calibration
will not be performed automatically. In such a case, take the following action.
When the supplied standard frames (F45) are used, press
.
Ÿ Calibration will be enabled. Go to Step 4).
When other frames are used, press
or
.
Ÿ Calibration will be disabled. Perform calibration again with the standard
frames.
4) After calibration is completed, trace the standard frames.
5) Press
.
8 - 36
Circumference
6) Check traced data (circumference) on the
MENU screen.
Circumference:
If it is not in the range of 162.83±0.05,
perform calibration with the standard frames
again.
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
㧖
‫ޓ‬
㧹
㧱
㧺
㨁
‫ޓ‬
㧖
㧖‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧸㨑㨚㨓㨠㨔‫ޓ‬㧾㧦㧝㧢㧞㧚㧤㧟‫ޓ‬㧸㧦㧝㧢㧞㧚㧤㧟㧖
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
‫ޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬ψ‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨛㨏㨑㨟㨟‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨡㨚㨠㨑㨞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㨃㨔㨑㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨐㨞㨑㨟㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧿㨕㨦㨑‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧮㨑㨢㨑㨘‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧭㨄㧵㧿‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓ‬
‫ޓޓޓ‬㧼㧰‫ޓ‬㨍㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬
7) Remove the standard frames.
2. Perform calibration with the standard pattern.
1) Set the provided standard pattern into the
tracer.
Fit the standard pattern with the side
inscribed with “A” facing to the pattern
setting unit.
2) Press
while holding
The LED beside
down.
will blink.
3) Press
.
Calibration will be performed.
4) After calibration is completed, trace the standard pattern.
5) Press
.
6) Check traced data (circumference) on the MENU screen.
Circumference:
If it is not in the range of 162.83±0.10, perform calibration with the standard pattern again.
7) Remove the standard pattern.
8.15 List of Consumable Articles
Articles
Order No.
Dressing stick for the roughing wheel 41002-M612
Dressing stick for the finishing wheel 41002-M611
Dressing stick for the polishing wheel 40140-M610
Stocking filter
40377-M061
Fuse (115 V AC)
804-02-02149
Fuse (230 V AC)
804-02-02152
§9
SPECIFICATIONS
Processing system
Beveling
Auto:
Guided:
Flat (Rimless) edging
Grooving
Computer-calculated bevel
Manual bevel setting, which enables you to select either
the curve profiling the front surface, the curve profiling
the rear surface, the specified curve value, the position
ratio or tilting amount
EX
Flat edging
EX
Auto:
Computer-calculated groove position and curve
Guided:
Manual-inputted groove position and curve
EX
Polishing
Chamfering
* Grooving and chamfering can be performed with the LE-9000SX Express only.
Processing lenses
Glass, plastic, high index plastic, polycarbonate, acrylic resin, and trivex lenses (except for glass
lenses of Type PLB)
Processing range
Max.
Lens size:
90 mm or less in diameter
Layout range: 110 mm or less in diameter
Min. (without safety bevel)In flat edging: 28 mm or more in diameter
(when the lens adapter and lens clamp are replaced for
half-eye lenses, up to min. 21 mm dia., vertical width:
19 mm)(when the optional pliable cup is used, up to
min. 32 mm dia., vertical width: 19 mm)
In beveling:
30 mm or more in diameter
(when the lens adapter and lens clamp are replaced for
half-eye lenses, up to min. 22 mm dia., vertical
width: 20 mm)(when the optional pliable cup is used,
up to min. 33 mm dia., vertical width: 20 mm)
Min. (with safety bevel) In flat edging: 34 mm or more in diameter
(when the lens adapter and lens clamp are replaced for
half-eye lenses, up to min. 28 mm dia., vertical width:
25 mm)(when the optional pliable cup is used, up to
min. 32 mm dia., vertical width: 25 mm)
In beveling:
36 mm or more in diameter (when the lens adapter
and lens clamp are replaced for half-eye lenses, up to
min. 29 mm dia., vertical width: 26 mm)(when the
optional pliable cup is used, up to min. 34 mm dia.,
vertical width: 26 mm)
* The processing range may change according to the processing mode.
9-2
Adjustable range
FPD:
PD:
1/2 PD:
Vertical layout:
Size adjustment:
Bevel position:
Groove position:
30.0 - 99.5 mm (0.5 mm increments)
30.0 - 99.5 mm (0.5 mm increments)
15.0 - 49.75 mm (0.25 mm increments)
±15.0 mm (0.1 mm increments)
±9.95 mm (0.05 mm increments)
±15.0 mm (0.1 mm increments)
±15.0 mm (0.1 mm increments) (LE-9000SX Express only)
Wheels
Type PC
Roughing wheel for plastic lenses:
Roughing wheel for glass lenses:
Finishing wheel:
Type PL4
Roughing wheel for plastic lenses:
Roughing wheel for glass lenses:
Finishing wheel:
Polishing wheel (for flat edge):
Type PLB
Roughing wheel for plastic lenses:
Finishing wheel:
Polishing wheel (for flat edge and bevel):
Type PLB-2R
Roughing wheel for plastic lenses:
Roughing wheel for glass lenses:
Finishing wheel:
Polishing wheel (for flat edge and bevel):
100 mm in diameter, 22 mm in width
100 mm in diameter, 17 mm in width
100 mm in diameter, 23 mm in width
100 mm in diameter, 17 mm in width
100 mm in diameter, 17 mm in width
100 mm in diameter, 23 mm in width
100 mm in diameter, 12 mm in width
100 mm in diameter, 22 mm in width
100 mm in diameter, 17.5 mm in width
100 mm in diameter, 17.5 mm in width
100 mm in diameter, 17 mm in width
100 mm in diameter, 17 mm in width
100 mm in diameter, 17.5 mm in width
100 mm in diameter, 17.5 mm in width
* Processing lens materials and polishing for each wheel component
Type
PC
PL4
PLB
PLB-2R
Lens material
PLA/HPL/PC/GLS/ACR/TRX
PLA/HPL/PC/GLS/ACR/TRX
PLA/HPL/PC/ACR/TRX
PLA/HPL/PC/GLS/ACR/TRX
Polishing
Unavailable
Flat edging except for glass lenses
Beveling and flat edging except for glass lenses
Beveling and flat edging except for glass lenses
9-3
Lens chucking
Chucking method:
Chucking pressure:
Electric system
20 kgf (pre-operation)
30 - 60 kgf (during operation)
Automatic setting according to lens material
Water supply system
Pump circulation
Other functions
Layout:
Layout input item:
Retouching function:
Frame memory function:
External communication:
Control outlet:
Active, passive, bifocal
FPD (DBL)
PD (1/2 PD)
Vertical layout
* Eye point layout function is available.
Available (Memory function is available.)
Standard storable data 100 sets
* The optional barcode scanner allows up to 500 sets of data to
be stored.
RS-232C 2 ports built-in
For connecting a PC
For connecting the barcode scanner
2 pcs. for pumps
Processing accuracy
Beveling size accuracy:
Flat edging size accuracy:
Axis angle:
±0.1 mm (dia.)
error in beveling (AUT) of I45 internal data
±0.1 mm (dia.)
error in flat edging (NYL) of I45 internal data
±1º
Specifications of tracing unit
Tracing method:
Traceable size:
FPD measurement function:
Frame clamp:
Framing of stylus:
3-D binocular automatic tracing
Frame R9 - R46
(vertically up to max. 30 mm from center)
Pattern R12 - R46
(vertically up to min. 10 mm from center)
Available
One-touch automatic clamp
Switchable between automatic and semiautomatic
9-4
Measurement accuracy:
Measurement time:
Frame tracing ±0.05 mm
(circumference error with F45 standard frames)
Pattern tracing ±0.1 mm
(circumference error with F45 standard pattern)
30 seconds (at binocular automatic tracing)
20 seconds (at pattern tracing)
Whole system
Dimensions:
Weight:
Power supply:
Power consumption:
Acoustic noise:
520 (W) × 484 (D) × 330 (H) mm (main body only)
42 kg (main body only)
A. 115 V AC 50/60 Hz
B. 230 V AC 50/60 Hz
(Main supply voltage fluctuation should not exceed ±10% of the
nominal voltage.)
* Each setting of A and B is set in factory.
1.5 k VA (max. during processing)
Maximum 70 dB (A)
according to Clause 1.7.4 of Machinery Directive
Environmental conditions (During transport/storage)
Temperature:
–25ºC - 70ºC
Humidity:
10% - 100%
Pressure :
700 hPa - 1060 hPa
(The conditions above indicate the state of the instrument packed.)
Environmental conditions (During use)
Setting location:
Temperature:
Humidity:
Pressure:
Altitude:
Indoor
5ºC - 40ºC
Relative humidity does not exceed 50% at a maximum temperature
of 40ºC.
700 hPa - 1060 hPa
Up to 1000 m at sea level
Transient overvoltages according to installation categories
(OVERVOLTAGE CATEGORIES)
II
Pollution degree
2 (IEC60664)
§10
ACCESSORIES
10.1 NIDEK-type Accessories
Suction cup ........................................................................................3 pcs.
Lens cup .............................................................................................5 pcs.
Double-coated adhesive tape .............................................................100 sheets
Half-eye lens cup (blue) .....................................................................5 pcs.
Half-eye lens cup (white) ...................................................................5 pcs.
Half-eye lens cup (pink) .....................................................................5 pcs.
Double-coated adhesive tape for half-eye lenses ...............................100 sheets
Half-eye lens adapter .........................................................................1 pc.
Half-eye lens clamp ...........................................................................1 pc.
Pattern tracing unit .............................................................................1 pc.
Dressing stick for the roughing wheel (WA80K)...............................1 pc. (except for PLB)
Dressing stick for the finishing wheel (WA320K) .............................1 pc.
Dressing stick for the polishing wheel (WA4000) .............................1 pc. (except for PC)
Lens cup remover ...............................................................................1 pc.
Power cord .........................................................................................1 pc.
Calibration jig ....................................................................................1 pc.
Standard frames .................................................................................1 pc.
Standard pattern .................................................................................1 pc.
Hex wrench (3 mm) ...........................................................................1 pc.
Hex wrench (4 mm) ...........................................................................1 pc.
Hex driver ..........................................................................................1 pc.
Spare fuse ...........................................................................................2 pcs.
Operator’s manual ..............................................................................1 volume
10.2 WECO-type Accessories
Double-coated adhesive tape .............................................................100 sheets
Dressing stick for the roughing wheel (WA80K)...............................1 pc. (except for PLB)
Dressing stick for the finishing wheel (WA320K) .............................1 pc.
Dressing stick for the polishing wheel (WA4000) .............................1 pc. (except for PC)
Half-eye lens adapter .........................................................................1 pc.
Half-eye lens clamp ...........................................................................1 pc.
Pattern setting unit .............................................................................1 pc.
Power cord .........................................................................................1 pc.
Calibration jig ....................................................................................1 pc.
Standard frames .................................................................................1 pc.
Standard pattern .................................................................................1 pc.
Hex wrench (3 mm) ...........................................................................1 pc.
Hex wrench (4 mm) ...........................................................................1 pc.
Hex driver ..........................................................................................1 pc.
Spare fuse ...........................................................................................2 pcs.
Operator’s manual ..............................................................................1 volume
10 - 2
10.3 SANTI-type Accessories
Double-coated adhesive tape .............................................................100 sheets
Dressing stick for the roughing wheel (WA80K)...............................1 pc. (except for PLB)
Dressing stick for the finishing wheel (WA320K) .............................1 pc.
Dressing stick for the polishing wheel (WA4000) .............................1 pc. (except for PC)
Half-eye lens clamp ...........................................................................1 pc.
Pattern setting unit .............................................................................1 pc.
Power cord .........................................................................................1 pc.
Calibration jig ....................................................................................1 pc.
Standard frames .................................................................................1 pc.
Standard pattern .................................................................................1 pc.
Hex wrench (3 mm) ...........................................................................1 pc.
Hex wrench (4 mm) ...........................................................................1 pc.
Hex driver ..........................................................................................1 pc.
Spare fuse ...........................................................................................2 pcs.
Operator’s manual ..............................................................................1 volume
APPENDIX A
SUPPLEMENT
A.1 Selection of Tracing
(1) Tracing frames
Normal tracing
Tracing one rim only
Tracing both rims
Set frames into the tracing unit.
㸣
Press
.
Single rim tracing
Set frames into the tracing unit.
㸣
Press
or
.
See "4.3.1.1 Tracing both rims" (p. 4-4).
See "4.3.1.2 Tracing a single rim" (p. 45).
The stylus does not fit into the bevel
groove automatically
Tracing unusually shaped frames
Tracing goggle type frames
Set one rim horizontally to the tracing
unit.
㸣
Tracing a single rim.
Semiauto tracing
Set frames into the tracing unit.
㸣
Press
for 3 seconds.
㸣
Set the stylus into the bevel groove by
hand.
㸣
Press
.
See "4.3.1.3 Semiauto tracing" (p. 4-5).
See "4.3.1.4 Tracing goggle type
frames" (p. 4-6).
A-2
(2) Tracing pattern or dummy lenses
Tracing the pattern
Tracing the dummy lens
Pattern tracing
Set a pattern to the tracing unit.
㸣
Press
or
.
Dummy lens tracing
Set a dummy lens to the tracing unit.
㸣
Press
or
.
See "4.3.2 Tracing the pattern" (p. 4-7).
See "4.3.3 Tracing the dummy lens"
(p. 4-8).
(3) Other functions
Tracing during processing
See "4.3.4 Tracing during processing"
(p. 4-10).
Stopping the tracing
See "4.3.5 Stopping the tracing" (p. 410).
A-3
A.2 Selection of Layout
(1) Layout forms
Normal input
Inputting monocular PD (1/2PD)
FPD
PD
Optical center
PD
1/2PD
This is the form to input FPD, PD and
the height of the optical center from the
center of the rim ( ).
See "4.4.1 Selecting processing
conditions and inputting layout data" (p.
4-11).
1/2PD
Optical center
This is the form to input the distance
from the frame bridge center to each
eye point separately.
See *5 of p. 4-13.
DBL input
PD
DBL
Optical center
This is the form to input DBL (distance
between the nasal ends of the right and
left rims) instead of FPD.
See *4 of p. 4-12.
Inputting the height from the lens outline
←→
Optical center
PD
Inputting eyepoint
BT
PD
This is the form to input the height of the
optical center by measuring the distance
from the eye point to the bottom of the
lens outline.
This is the form to input the eyepoint as
the optical center by the distance
measured from the nasal and bottom
sides of the lens outline.
See "4.4.2 Inputting the height from the
lens outline (p. 4-14).
See "4.4.3 Eye point layout" (p. 4-17).
A-4
(2) Selection of lenses and layout
Bifocal lenses
Progressive power lenses
See "4.4.2.1 Layout of bifocal lenses"
(p. 4-15).
See "4.4.2.2 Layout of progressive
power lenses" (p. 4-16).
A.3 Selection of Blocking
Active mode
Passive mode
FPD
PD
Blocking point
FPD
PD
Optical center
Horizontally
decentering
amount
Vertically
decentering
amount
Rim center
Rim center
Blocking point:
Rim center
Optical center
This is for blocking a lens at the optical
center.
This is for blocking a lens at the rim
center.
See "4.5.1 Blocking in active mode
(p. 4-18).
See "4.5.2 Blocking in passive mode
(p. 4-19).
Bifocal mode
5 mm OUTSIDE
PD for near vision
5 mm ABOVE
PD
BT
Blocking point: 5 mm ABOVE/ 5 mm OUTSIDE
This if for bifocal lenses. Block at the
position 5 mm above and 5 mm outside
from the top line center of the segment
with a lens cup.
A-5
A.4 Selection of Processing
(1) Processsing mode
Creating computer-calculated bevels
See "4.6.1.1 Auto processing mode"
(p. 4-22).
Adjusting bevel position
Guided processing mode
Select "GUI".
㸣
Press
Creating bevels on EX lenses
See "4.6.1.4 EX lens processing mode"
(p. 4-32).
.
㸣
Check the Bevel simulation display.
㸣
Adjust the bevel curve and bevel
position.
㸣
Press
.
See "4.6.1.2 Guided processing mode"
(p. 4-25).
Flat edging
EX lens flat edging
See "4.6.2.1 Flat (rimless) edging mode"
(p. 4-36).
See "4.6.2.2 EX lens flat (rimless)
edging mode" (p. 4-39).
Creating computer-calculated
grooves (LE-9000SX Express only)
Adjusting bevel position
(LE-9000SX Express only)
See "4.6.2.3 Auto grooving mode"
(p. 4-41).
Adjusting groove position
Select "NYL" and "GUI".
㸣
Press
EX lens grooving mode
(LE-9000SX Express only)
See "4.6.2.5 EX lens grooving mode"
(p. 4-47).
.
㸣
Check the Groove simulation display.
㸣
Adjust the groove curve and groove
position.
㸣
Press
.
See "4.6.2.4 Guided grooving mode"
(p. 4-43).
A-6
Polishing lens edges
(Type PL4, PLB, and PLB-2R)
Chamfering
(LE-9000SX Express only)
See "4.6.3.3 Polishing" (p. 4-56).
See "4.6.3.4 Chamfering" (p. 4-57).
(2) Special processing
Finished lens size is too large for
frame
Retouching
Change the size value.
㸣
Press
.
Processing a lens which has already
been mounted on one frame in order
to fit it into another frame.
Processing for frame change
Trace frames.
㸣
Press
See "4.7 Checking the Lens Size" (p. 460).
Processing half-eye lenses
The message "Use chuck for halfeye lens" appears.
Half-eye lens processing
Replace the adapter set with the one for
half-eye lenses.
See "4.6.3.2 Processing half-eye lenses
(p. 4-53).
.
㸣
Press
.
㸣
Trace the lens.
㸣
Set processing conditions and input
layout data.
㸣
Press
.
See "4.6.3.1 Processing for frame
changing" (p. 4-50).
APPENDIX B
ERROR CODE
The instrument is provided with the self-diagnostic function and runs checks which constantly
monitor the working state during operation. If any failure occurs, the instrument will stop
automatically and show the error code on the display panel. In the event of a failure, inform of the
error code as well as the symptoms of the instrument. The error code is essential to proper repair
work.
The contents of each error code are as follows. As for the error code whose action is provided,
follow its procedure before contacting NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
ERROR CODE
0001
0002
0003
0107
0108
0201
0204
0205
CONTENTS
Processing data transmission error.
Action: Check the cable from the RS-232C connector and connections
of the peripheral devices.
Processing data reception error.
Action: Check the cable from the RS-232C connector and connections
of the peripheral devices.
Received data nonconformance (during VCA communication)
Action: Check if the received processing information is proper.
Roughing is not completed.
The wheel does not turn at the start of processing.
Action: Turn the power off and then on 20 seconds later.
The feeler is not initialized.
Action: Press
after moving the feeler to the center of the processing
chamber by lifting. If the feeler cannot be moved to the center in relation to
the position with the lens, turn the power off. Then, move the feeler to the
center after moving the shaft which holds the lens to the side.
After the rear surface of a lens is measured, its front surface cannot be
measured.
Action: When the front surface is measured, hold the feeler down
lightly.
Data for lens measurement or lens measured result is abnormal.
Aciton: Perform operation again from frame tracing.
0206
First data in lens shape measurement is abnormal.
0207
Data of the start and end in lens shape measurement does not agree.
Action: Perform operation again from lens shape measurement by
pressing
.
0208
0209
0301
0302
When the rear surface of a lens is measured, the feeler is positioned beyond
its measurable range.
When the front surface of a lens is measured, the feeler is positioned beyond
its measurable range.
Y axis data for processing is abnormal.
Action: Perform operation again from frame tracing.
X axis data for processing is abnormal.
Action: If an error occurs before processing, perform operation again
from lens shape measurement by pressing
0401
0402
The X, Y, or θ axis motor is abnormal.
Initialization of the X axis motor is abnormal.
0403
Initialization of the Y axis motor is abnormal.
0404
Initialization of the θ axis motor is abnormal.
.
B-2
ERROR CODE
CONTENTS
0408
Initialization of the F axis motor is abnormal.
Action: Press
to clear the error message. Turn the power off and
then on after moving the feeler to the center of the processing unit.
0501
0601
The chuck motor does not run.
The chamfering/grooving wheel motor is abnormal (overcurrent).
0602
0603
Initialization of the chamfering/grooving unit is abnormal.
Processing end sensor error of the chamfering/grooving unit.
0604
Setting position of the processing end sensor of the chamfering/grooving unit
is improper.
0801
CPU false interrupt error.
0802
CPU address error.
0803
CPU DMA bus error.
0900
EEPROM write error.
0901
Size constant in roughing is out of its specified range.
0902
Size constant is out of its specified range.
0903
Bevel position constant is out of its specified range.
0904
The wheel position parameter is out of its specified range.
0905
Frame memory verification error.
0906
Frame memory CRC check error.
APPENDIX C
GLOSSARY
In this manual, the following terms are used to provide an easy understanding of the contents.
Therefore, thoroughly understand them before reading the contents of this manual.
Active mode
This is the mode to block a lens at the optical center.
Auto processing mode
In this mode, the bevel curve and bevel position are automatically calculated by a computer to
determine the best values for processing.
Auto grooving mode
In this mode, the groove curve and groove position are automatically calculated by a computer
to determine the best values for grooving. (LE-9000SX Express only)
Bifocal mode
This mode is for laying out bifocal lenses. In this mode, a lens is blocked at 5 mm above and 5
mm outside from the top line center of the segment with a lens cup by using a centering device.
Chamfering
This is the method to chamfer the rear surface or both surfaces of a lens before processing is
completed. (LE-9000SX Express only)
DBL (Distance Between Lenses)
This represents the distance between the nasal ends of the left and right rims.
EX lens processing mode
This mode serves to process EX lenses. In this mode, the bevel curve follows the rear surface.
EX lens grooving mode
This mode serves to groove EX lenses for nylor frames. In this mode, the groove curve follows
the rear surface. (LE-9000SX Express only)
Eye point layout
This is the form to input the eye points as the optical center by the distance measured from the
nasal and bottom sides of a lens outline. This form serves to specify the position of the eye
point, which is marked on the dummy lenses, as the optical center.
DBL
FPD (Frame Pupillary Distance)
This represents the distance between the right and left
rim centers. The rim centers are calculated by the boxing
system.
FPD
Goggle type frame tracing
This is the method to trace unusually shaped frames, such as goggles. The stylus may often
come off the groove of such frames. In such cases, set only one rim in the tracing unit and hold
the frame temple on the other side while tracing.
C-2
Processing for frame changing mode
This is the mode to process a lens, which has already been mounted on one frame, in order to fit
it into another frame.
Guided processing mode
In this mode, bevel curve and bevel position can be specified manually.
Guided grooving mode
In this mode, groove curve and groove position for nylor frames can be specified manually.
(LE-9000SX Express only)
Half-eye lens processing
For frames whose vertical width is short, the mark of the optical center becomes
, and as
soon as processing starts, the “Use chuck for half-eye lens” message will appear and the instrument will
stop temporarily. These indications mean that the lens adapter or lens clamp may contact the wheels.
Replace the lens adapter, lens clamp and lens cup with the ones for half-eye lenses.
Memory function
This is the function which memorizes traced data and layout data in the memory and reads them
whenever necessary. The memory holds up to 100 sets of the traced and layout data.
Passive mode
This is the mode to block a lens at the rim center.
Polishing
This is the mode to polish the lens edge to save your time required to buff the lens edge after
beveling or flat edging. (Types PL4, PLB, and PLB-2R)
Semiauto tracing
This is the method to manually bring the stylus into the groove of the frame in the case that the
stylus cannot be set in the groove automatically.
Simple frame changing mode
This is the method to process a lens in the frame changing mode without tracing the lens. When
the lens size is large enough for the new frames and there is no need of lens tracing, the trouble
of tracing a lens can be saved in this mode.
Single rim tracing
This is the method to trace one of the frame rims.
Soft processing
This is the processing method to perform the roughing process by controlling the pressure applied
to a lens precisely. Even though the processing time is extended a little, the processing sound
and axis shift during processing are reduced.
C-3
Storage of the initial display
This is the function to store items shown on the Layout screen at power-up.
TRX
One of the lens material settings. Used to process lenses that melt easily from heat such as trivex
lenses.
INDEX
A
Active mode .............................................. 4-18
Adjusting the axis shift ............................. 8-16
Adjusting the bevel position ..................... 8-14
Adjusting the groove position................... 8-27
Adjusting the lens margin allowed for finishing
............................................................... 8-18
Auto-correction of FPD ............................ 4-37
Auto processing mode .............................. 4-22
Auto grooving mode ................................. 4-41
B
Barcode scanner ................................. 3-2, 5-10
Bevel curve ............................................... 4-26
Beveling .................................................... 4-21
Bevel position ........................................... 4-27
Bevel simulation ..................... 4-25, 4-33, 4-48
Bifocal lenses ................................... 4-15, 4-20
Blocking lenses ......................................... 4-18
C
Cataract lenses ........................ 4-12, 4-21, 4-26
Chamfering ............................. 4-12, 4-21, 4-55
Chamfering amount ......................... 8-31, 8-32
Contrast control .......................................... 3-1
Control panel for processing unit ........ 3-1, 3-7
Control panel for tracing unit ..................... 3-5
Cup remover ............................................. 4-62
D
Daily check after use ................................ 4-65
Daily check before use .............................. 4-64
DBL ................................................... 3-9, 4-12
Display panel ....................................... 3-1, 3-9
E
Error code (No.) ....................... 2-10, 3-13, B-1
EX lenses ................................ 4-32, 4-39, 4-47
EX lens processing mode ......................... 4-32
EX lens flat (rimless) edging mode .......... 4-39
EX lens grooving mode ............................ 4-47
Ext. interface ............................................... 5-3
Eye point layout ........................................ 4-17
F
Finishing wheel........................................... 3-4
Flat (rimless) edging mode ....................... 4-36
Flat (rimless) edging ................................. 4-36
FPD ...................................................... 3-9, 5-3
Frame changing mode............................... 4-19
Frame pupillary distance ............................. 3-9
Front base curve ............................... 4-26, 4-43
G
Groove curve ............................................ 4-44
Groove depth ................................... 8-26, 8-28
Groove position ........................................ 4-45
Groove simulation ............................. 3-3, 4-44
Groove width ............................................ 8-26
Guided processing mode .......................... 4-25
Guided grooving mode ............................. 4-43
I
In the case that the stylus cannot
be set in the groove automatically ........... 4-6
Inputting the frame tilt angle .................... 4-59
L
Layout ....................................................... 4-12
Layout screen .............................................. 3-9
Lens material ....................................... 1-1, 9-2
M
Memory address.......................................... 5-7
Memory function ................................. 5-4, 5-6
MENU screen ........................................... 3-13
Minimum lens diameter .............................. 3-9
Monocular PD........................................... 4-13
Index - 2
P
Parameter exchange mode screen ............. 3-13
Parameter settings ....................................... 5-2
Passive mode ............................................ 4-19
Pattern setting unit ...................................... 4-7
Pattern setting unit support ......................... 4-7
Pattern tracing pin ....................... 3-5, 4-8, 4-10
Periodical check ........................................ 4-65
PD ........................................................ 3-9, 5-3
PD adjustment .......................................... 8-19
PNT ........................................................... 4-36
Polishing ................................. 4-12, 4-21, 4-54
Polishing wheel........................................... 3-4
Power switch........................................ 3-1, 4-3
Process counter ........................................... 5-1
Processing conditions ................................ 4-11
Processing for frame changing ................. 4-50
Processing half-eye lenses ........................ 4-53
Processing mode ................................ 3-8, 4-21
Processing type ........................................... 1-1
Progressive power lenses ................. 4-16, 4-18
Pupillary distance........................................ 3-9
R
Ratio ................................................ 4-26, 4-45
Rear base curve ................................ 4-26, 4-45
Replacing the water .................................... 8-5
Retouching lenses ..................................... 4-60
Rim clips ..................................................... 3-5
Roughing wheel for glass lenses ................ 3-4
RS-232C interface connector ...................... 3-2
S
Sectional view
position line ............... 4-25, 4-33, 4-44, 4-48
Semiauto tracing ......................................... 4-5
SFB mode ................................................. 8-31
Simple frame changing mode ................... 4-52
Simulation screen ...................................... 3-11
Size adjustment ....................... 4-13, 4-60, 8-13
Soft processing ......................................... 4-58
Soundproof cover ....................................... 3-1
Stocking filter ...................................... 8-5, 8-8
Storing the initial screen ............................. 5-6
Storing and recalling traced data ................ 5-7
Stylus .......................................................... 3-5
T
Tilt base position ....................................... 3-11
TILT function (parameter) .......................... 5-5
Tilting function ................................ 4-29, 4-34
Tracer calibration ...................................... 8-35
Tracing both rims ........................................ 4-4
Tracing the dummy lens ............................. 4-8
Tracing goggle type frames......................... 4-6
Tracing the pattern ...................................... 4-7
Tracing a single rim .................................... 4-5
Tracing unit ................................................. 3-5
Two-point.................................................. 4-36
W
Wheels ........................................................ 3-3
Wheel dressing ........................................... 8-1
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement